JP7768866B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine equipped with a base plate on which a light-emitting means is arranged.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a board on which light-emitting means are arranged are known (see Patent Document 1). This gaming machine is equipped with an upper frame lamp on which an LED (light-emitting means) and a screw are arranged. In particular, the height of the screw head relative to the surface of the board is made higher than the height of the LED relative to the surface of the board. This causes the light emitted from the LED to be reflected by the screw head, creating a beautiful appearance.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-96731

However, in conventional gaming machines, the screw heads can obstruct the progression of light emitted from the LED, narrowing the reach of the light emitted from the LED and potentially reducing the performance of the light emitted from the LED.
An object of the present invention is to prevent degradation of the presentation quality caused by light emitted from the light-emitting means.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the first invention comprises a board and components arranged on the board, the components including a top-view type light-emitting means and other components, the other components including an IC that controls the operation of the light-emitting means, the other components being arranged in an outer position relative to the light-emitting means, nothing being arranged between the light-emitting means and the other components that blocks the light irradiated by the light-emitting means, except for the components that make up the light-emitting means, the height of the other components relative to the surface of the board is higher than the height of the light-emitting means relative to the surface of the board, and the other components are arranged so as not to be within the range of illumination of the light by the light-emitting means.
In the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention, other components are arranged on the circuit board so as not to be within the range of light emitted by the light-emitting means. This prevents the progression of light emitted from the light-emitting means from being obstructed by other components, and prevents the range of light emitted from the light-emitting means from being narrowed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the performance of the game due to the light emitted from the light-emitting means.
Here, the substrate corresponds to a substrate 710 described later. The light emitting means corresponds to a light emitting element 721 described later. The other components correspond to an IC 722 described later, etc. The irradiation range corresponds to an irradiation range ir described later.

This invention makes it possible to prevent the performance of the light emitted from the light-emitting means from being reduced.

1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the front of the game board, and is a schematic diagram showing parts particularly necessary for explanation. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a control system of a pachinko machine. 1 is an address map of the memory area used by the CPU 210. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the contents of the game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the winning probabilities of various lotteries. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the types of winnings in various lotteries. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the time for which special symbols are selected and set during each game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the transition of game states. 10 is a flowchart showing a CPU initialization process. 10 is a flowchart showing an initialization process when power is restored. 10 is a flowchart showing a main loop process. 10 is a flowchart showing a save process when power is cut off. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a dynamic port output process. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance display device output process. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting-related process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a switch management process. 10 is a flowchart showing the normal starting ball detection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing the starting ball detection process. This is a flowchart showing the starting ball detection process for Special Chart 2. 10 is a flowchart showing a special pattern random number acquisition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a special game management process. This is a flowchart showing the special game management process for Special Chart 2. This is a flowchart showing the special game management processing for Special Figure 1. 10 is a flowchart showing a special game management process when a prize is won. 10 is a flowchart showing a special chart change waiting process. 10 is a flowchart showing processing during special chart change. 10 is a flowchart showing processing during special chart stop. This is a flowchart showing the processing before the large prize opening. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for controlling the opening of the large prize opening. 10 is a flowchart showing a special electric utility opening/closing switching process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of validating the closing of the large prize opening. A flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the large prize opening. This is a flowchart showing the processing before the large prize opening is opened when a small win occurs. This is a flowchart showing the process for controlling the opening of the large prize opening when a small win occurs. 10 is a flowchart showing a special electric utility opening/closing switching process. This is a flowchart showing the process of closing the large prize opening when a small win occurs. This is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the large prize opening when a small win occurs. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal game management process. 10 is a flowchart showing the normal game management process. 10 is a flowchart showing the normal game management process when a win occurs. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of waiting for a change in the general map. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing during normal map fluctuation. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing performed when the map is stopped. This is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for normal electric devices. 10 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory opening control process. 10 is a flowchart showing the normal electric utility opening/closing switching process. This is a flowchart showing the normal electric device closure validity process. This is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the release of a normal electric device. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance display device control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a sub-timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process. 10 is a flowchart showing a hold command receiving process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a read-ahead command reception process. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable command receiving process. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop command reception process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an opening command receiving process. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the configuration of an illumination board 700 according to the first embodiment. A side view showing the relationship between the light irradiation range ir of the light emitting element 721 and the wiring w drawn out from the connector 723 in the illumination board 700 of Example 1. FIG. 7 is a side view showing the configuration of an illumination board 700 according to a second embodiment. FIG. 7 is a plan view showing the configuration of an illumination board 700 according to a second embodiment. A side view showing the configuration of an illuminated substrate 700 related to a modified example of Example 2. FIG. 10 is a side view showing the configuration of an illumination board 700 according to a third embodiment.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In this embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1.

(Overall configuration of pachinko machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 1 is configured to include an outer frame unit 2, an inner frame unit 3, an integrated door unit 4, and a game board unit 10.
The outer frame unit 2, inner frame unit 3, and integrated door unit 4 are fixed to one another via a hinge mechanism, which allows the inner frame unit 3 to be opened and closed relative to the outer frame unit 2. The integrated door unit 4 can also be opened and closed relative to both the inner frame unit 3 and the outer frame unit 2.

The outer frame unit 2 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (outer frame). The outer frame of the outer frame unit 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the game center.
The inner frame unit 3 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is disposed inside the outer frame unit 2.
The integrated door unit 4 is formed in the shape of a rectangular door and includes a transparent plate 4a disposed in the approximate center, a decorative portion 4b disposed around the periphery of the transparent plate 4a, a tray unit 5 disposed below the transparent plate 4a, and a firing handle 6 disposed to the side of the tray unit 5.
The transparent plate 4a is formed in a flat plate shape from a transparent material such as resin or glass. The decorative portion 4b is formed from a transparent or translucent resin material and has a shape that bulges forward. Each upper corner of the decorative portion 4b is provided with a sound vent 4c, inside which a speaker 22 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. Each sound vent 4c has a plurality of sound holes that allow sound output from the speaker 22 to pass through. The decorative portion 4b is also provided with a frame lamp 20 (see FIG. 3). The frame lamp 20 is configured to include a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The tray unit 5 has a tray 5a for receiving game balls (loan balls and prize balls), and an effect button 5b and a rotary selector 5c arranged in front of the tray 5a.
The effect button 5b is formed in a roughly cylindrical shape and is arranged to protrude upward from the tray unit 5. The effect button 5b can be pressed (pushed downward) by the player. A first operation detection switch 24 (see FIG. 3) that detects the pressing of the effect button 5b is arranged inside the tray unit 5. The first operation detection switch 24 outputs a first operation signal to the effect control board 300 (see FIG. 3) each time the effect button 5b is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called "jog dial") is formed in a roughly cylindrical shape and is arranged to surround the effect button 5b. The rotary selector 5c can be rotated by the player (by rotating it around its cylindrical axis). A second operation detection switch 25 (see Figure 3) that detects the rotation of the rotary selector 5c is arranged inside the tray unit 5. The second operation detection switch 25 outputs a second operation signal to the effect control board 300 each time the rotary selector 5c is rotated a predetermined angle (for example, 60°).

A loan operation unit 7 is disposed on the top surface of the tray unit 5. The loan operation unit 7 has a ball loan button 7a, a return button 7b, and a degree display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to a CR unit (not shown) that can read and update information recorded on a prepaid card. When a prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit, the remaining number of points of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit is displayed on the point display device 7c.
When the ball loan button 7a is operated with the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit, a predetermined number of game balls are dispensed into the tray 5a. At this time, the remaining number of points of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls dispensed, and the updated remaining number of points of the valuable medium is displayed on the point display device 7c.
Furthermore, when the return button 7b is operated while a prepaid card with remaining credits of the valuable medium is inserted into the CR unit, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit.
Here, examples of prepaid cards include magnetic storage media, media with built-in storage ICs, and the like.
The launch handle 6 can be rotated by the player. A launch volume 410 (see FIG. 3) is disposed inside the launch handle 6, which detects the angle at which the launch handle 6 is rotated. The launch volume 410 outputs a detection signal corresponding to the detected angle to the payout control board 400 (see FIG. 3).

(Configuration of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
FIG. 2 shows the front of the game board, and is a diagram that shows in schematic form parts particularly necessary for explanation.
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached to the inside of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3. This allows the game board unit 10 to be positioned on the back side of the integrated door unit 4. The player can then view the game board 11 (play area 30), which will be described later, through the transparent plate 4a. In this embodiment, the game area 30, which will be described later, is configured between the back side of the transparent plate 4a and the front side of the game board 11.
As shown in Figure 2, the game board unit 10 comprises a set board (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set board, and various presentation devices (main image display device 31, sub-image display device 32, movable body unit, etc.) attached to the set board.
The set plate is formed in a box shape with an open front side, and an opening formed as a through hole is provided in the approximate center of the rear plate of the set plate.
The gaming board 11 is attached to the front side of the set board. The gaming board 11 is made of resin and formed into a flat plate. An opening (not shown) consisting of a through-hole is provided in the approximate center of the gaming board 11. The player can view the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 through the openings provided in the gaming board 11 and the set board.
A game area 30 is formed around the opening on the front of the game board 11, along which game balls flow down when the launch handle 6 is rotated. The game area 30 is configured with two paths for game balls to flow down: a left path formed on the left side of the main image display device 31, and a right path formed on the right side of the main image display device 31.
Furthermore, a board lamp 21 (see FIG. 3) is provided in the play area 30 of the game board 11. The board lamp 21 is configured to include a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEDs) that are driven by dynamic lighting control.

The main image display device 31 is attached to the back side of the set board. The main image display device 31 is configured with a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display, a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display, etc. The main image display device 31 has a display screen 31a that can display effect images.
The display screen 31a can be configured to have a special pattern display area A (not shown) corresponding to the special pattern 1 display device (first special pattern) described later, and a special pattern display area B (not shown) corresponding to the special pattern 2 display device (second special pattern) described later.
Each of the effect pattern display areas A and B is composed of three first effect pattern display areas a1 to a3 in which the first effect pattern z1 (not shown) is displayed, and one second effect pattern display area a4 in which the second effect pattern z2 (not shown) is displayed.
The first effect symbol z1 is composed of identification information (symbols) such as numbers, letters, symbols, characters, etc. In each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, it is possible to display the first effect symbol z1 in a variable and stationary manner. The second effect symbol z2 is composed of color bars. In the second effect symbol display area a4, it is possible to display the second effect symbol z2 in a variable and stationary manner.
The variable display of the performance patterns z1 and z2 refers to a display in which the first performance pattern z1 is moved (scrolled) in each of the first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3, and the type of the second performance pattern z2 displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 is changed (the color represented by the color bar is changed sequentially).
The stopped display of the performance patterns z1 and z2 refers to a display in which one type of first performance pattern z1 is stopped at the lottery result display position of each of the first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3, and one type of second performance pattern z2 is displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 (the color bar shows a specified color).
Then, in the effect symbol display area A, the result of the first special symbol lottery is displayed by combining the first effect symbol z1 displayed in a stopped state in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 and the second effect symbol z2 displayed in a stopped state in the second effect symbol display area a4.
In addition, in the effect pattern display area B, the result of the second special pattern lottery is displayed by combining the first effect pattern z1 displayed in a stopped state in the three first effect pattern display areas a1 to a3 and the second effect pattern z2 displayed in a stopped state in the second effect pattern display area a4.
In addition, the display screen 31a can be configured with reserved symbol display areas b1 and b2 (not shown) in which reserved symbol h (not shown) is displayed.
The reserved symbol display area b1 displays a reserved symbol h corresponding to the special symbol 1 game information described later. The reserved symbol display area b2 displays a reserved symbol h corresponding to the special symbol 2 game information described later.

The sub-image display device 32 is disposed at a position on the front side of the main image display device 31 .
The sub-image display device 32 is configured by a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display, a CRT display, etc. The sub-image display device 32 has a display screen 32a capable of displaying a performance image.
The sub-image display device 32 can be displaced (moved) in the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Specifically, the sub-image display device 32 can be displaced within a predetermined range including an origin position (see FIG. 2) and a performance position (not shown) below the origin position.
The sub-image display device 32 disposed (displaced) at the origin position is disposed above the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and does not cover the display screen 31a. On the other hand, the sub-image display device 32 disposed (displaced) at the performance position is disposed in front of the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and covers part of the display screen 31a.

The left path is provided with a first starting opening 51. The first starting opening 51 is an entry opening (a so-called "navel") that opens upward and allows game balls to enter at all times. The first starting opening 51 allows game balls flowing down the left path to enter (game balls flowing down the right path cannot enter).
A special symbol 1 start port switch 101 (see FIG. 3) is disposed within the first start port 51. The special symbol 1 start port switch 101 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of a game ball entering the first start port 51 (entry of a game ball into the first start port 51). The main control board 200 executes a first special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special symbol 1 start port switch 101.

To the left of the first starting opening 51 on the left path are an upper left other winning opening 57a, a middle left other winning opening 57b, and a lower left other winning opening 57c. Each of the other winning openings 57a-57c is an opening that opens upward and allows game balls to enter at all times. Each of the other winning openings 57a-57c allows game balls that flow down the left path to enter (but not game balls that flow down the right path).
A left prize opening switch 106 (see FIG. 3) is disposed on the gaming board 11. In response to the detection of a gaming ball entering one of the other prize openings 57a to 57c (entry of a gaming ball into one of the other prize openings 57a to 57c), the left prize opening switch 106 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200. In response to the input of the detection signal from the left prize opening switch 106, the main control board 200 causes the gaming ball payout device 440 to perform a payout operation of prize balls.

At the most upstream of the right-hand path, a start gate 41 is provided. The start gate 41 is formed so that game balls can always pass through. The start gate 41 allows game balls flowing down the right-hand path to pass through (but does not allow game balls flowing down the left-hand path to pass through).
A gate switch 104 (see FIG. 3) is provided in the start gate 41. The gate switch 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of a gaming ball passing through the start gate 41 (passage of the gaming ball through the start gate 41). In response to the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 104, the main control board 200 executes a normal symbol lottery.

A third starting opening 53 is provided downstream of starting gate 41 on the right path. Third starting opening 53 is provided with a normal electric device (normal electric device) 53a that can be displaced between a closed state that prevents game balls from entering third starting opening 53 and an open state that allows game balls to enter third starting opening 53.
The normal electric device 53a is opened and closed by a normal electric device solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). Normally, the normal electric device 53a is closed and game balls cannot enter the third starting opening 53, but if the normal symbol lottery is won, the normal electric device 53a is opened and game balls can enter. The third starting opening 53 allows game balls flowing down the right path to enter (game balls flowing down the left path cannot enter).
A second special symbol 2 start port switch 102b (see FIG. 3) is disposed within the third start port 53. The second special symbol 2 start port switch 102b outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of a game ball entering the third start port 53 (entry of a game ball into the third start port 53). The main control board 200 executes a second special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the second special symbol 2 start port switch 102b.

A first large prize opening 54 is provided downstream of the third starting opening 53 on the right path. The first large prize opening 54 is provided with a first special electric device (special electric device) 54a that can be displaced between a closed state that prevents game balls from entering the first large prize opening 54 and an open state that allows game balls to enter the first large prize opening 54.
The first special electric device 54a is opened and closed by a first large prize opening solenoid 65a (see FIG. 3). Normally, the first special electric device 54a is closed, preventing game balls from entering the first large prize opening 54. However, if a "jackpot" is won through a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), the first special electric device 54a is opened, allowing game balls to enter. The first large prize opening 54 allows game balls flowing down the right path to enter (but not game balls flowing down the left path).
A first count switch 103a (see FIG. 3) is disposed within the first large prize opening 54. The first count switch 103a outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of a game ball entering the first large prize opening 54 (entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 54). In response to the input of the detection signal from the first count switch 103a, the main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to perform a payout operation of prize balls.
In addition, within the first large prize opening 54, there are provided a V area (not shown), a discharge area (not shown), and a distribution means (not shown) that distributes game balls that enter the first large prize opening 54 to one of the V area and the discharge area.
A V-area switch 110 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the V-area. The V-area switch 110 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of a gaming ball passing through the V-area (passage of the gaming ball through the V-area). In response to the input of the detection signal from the V-area switch 110, the main control board 200 sets "1" in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, which will be described later.
The distribution means can be switched between a V-passing state in which the game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 54 is distributed to the V area, and a non-V-passing state in which the game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 54 is distributed to the discharge area.
That is, when the distribution means is displaced to the V-passing state, all game balls that enter the first large winning opening 54 are distributed to the V-area. This makes it impossible for game balls that enter the first large winning opening 54 to pass through the discharge area.
On the other hand, when the distribution means is displaced to the non-V passing state, all game balls that enter the first large winning opening 54 are distributed to the discharge area. This makes it impossible for game balls that enter the first large winning opening 54 to pass through the V area.
The distribution means is displaced by a V-zone solenoid 66 (see FIG. 3).
A gaming ball that enters the first large winning opening 54 is first detected by the first count switch 103a, then sorted by the sorting means into one of the V area and the discharge area, and after passing through that area, is discharged into the discharge path. At this time, the gaming ball sorted into the V area is detected by the V area switch 110.

A second starting opening 52 is provided downstream of the first large winning opening 54 on the right-hand path. The second starting opening 52 is an entry opening (a so-called "navel") that opens upward and allows game balls to enter at all times. The second starting opening 52 allows game balls flowing down the right-hand path to enter (game balls flowing down the left-hand path cannot enter).
A first special symbol 2 start port switch 102a (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the second start port 52. The first special symbol 2 start port switch 102a outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of a game ball entering the second start port 52 (entry of a game ball into the second start port 52). The main control board 200 executes a second special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the first special symbol 2 start port switch 102a.

A second large prize opening 55 is provided downstream of the second starting opening 52 on the right path. The second large prize opening 55 is provided with a second special electric device (special electric device) 55a that can be displaced between a closed state that prevents game balls from entering the second large prize opening 55 and an open state that allows game balls to enter the second large prize opening 55.
The second special electric device 55a is opened and closed by a second large prize opening solenoid 65b (see FIG. 3). Normally, the second special electric device 55a is closed, preventing game balls from entering the second large prize opening 55. However, if a "small win" is won through the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery), the second special electric device 55a is opened, allowing game balls to enter. The second large prize opening 55 allows game balls flowing down the right path to enter (but not game balls flowing down the left path).
A second count switch 103b (see FIG. 3) is disposed within the second large prize opening 55. The second count switch 103b outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of a game ball entering the second large prize opening 55 (entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 55). In response to the input of the detection signal from the second count switch 103b, the main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to perform a payout operation of prize balls.

A right other winning opening 56 is provided downstream of the second large winning opening 55 on the right path. The right other winning opening 56 is an opening that opens upward and allows game balls to enter at all times. The right other winning opening 56 allows game balls that flow down the right path to enter (game balls that flow down the left path cannot enter).
A right prize opening switch 105 (see FIG. 3) is disposed inside the right prize opening 56. The right prize opening switch 105 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of a game ball entering the right prize opening 56 (entry of a game ball into the right prize opening 56). In response to the input of the detection signal from the right prize opening switch 105, the main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to perform the payout operation of the prize balls.

An outlet 58 is provided at the most downstream end of the game area 30 for discharging game balls that have not entered any of the winning holes 51 to 56, 57a to 57c (to win a prize).
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which game balls discharged from the play area 30 pass. Specifically, the discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3. The pachinko machine 1 is configured so that all game balls shot into the play area 30 (all game balls discharged from the play area 30) pass through the discharge path. That is, game balls shot into the play area 30 are discharged from the play area 30 by entering any of the winning holes 51 to 56, 57a to 57c or by passing through the outlet 58, and then flow into the discharge path.
Specifically, game balls entering each of the winning holes 51 to 56, 57a to 57c are detected by switches 101, 102a, 102b, 103a, 103b, 105, 106, 110 disposed in the winning hole, and then guided to the discharge path. In addition, game balls discharged from outlet 58 are guided to the discharge path.
An out switch 109 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the inner frame unit 3. The out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of a game ball passing through the discharge path (a game ball discharged from the game area 30). As a result, all game balls discharged from the game area 30 are detected by the out switch 109.
Furthermore, in the game area 30, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged so as to guide the game balls to each of the winning holes 51 to 56, 57a to 57c and the starting gate 41.

A main display device 60 is disposed on the gaming board 11. The main display device 60 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is configured as a light-emitting element (in this embodiment, an LED).
The main display device 60 displays information related to the game.
The main display device 60 is configured to include a special chart 1 display device, a special chart 2 display device, a normal chart display device, a special chart 1 reserve display device, a special chart 2 reserve display device, a normal chart reserve display device, a round display device, a right-hand hit display device, a probability change display device, and a time-saving display device.
Specifically, the main display device 60 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32).
In the main display device 60, LED1 to LED8 constitute the special chart 1 display device, LED7 to LED16 constitute the special chart 2 display device, LED17 and 18 constitute the normal chart display device, LED19 to LED23 constitute the round display device, LED24 constitutes the right-hit display device, LED25 and 26 constitute the special chart 1 reserve display device, LED27 and 28 constitute the special chart 2 reserve display device, LED29 and 30 constitute the normal chart reserve display device, LED31 constitutes the probability change display device, and LED32 constitutes the time-saving display device.

The special symbol 1 display device is capable of displaying the variation and stopping of the first special symbol consisting of numbers, symbols, etc. The special symbol 1 display device displays the result of the first special symbol lottery by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
The special symbol 2 display device is capable of displaying the variation and stopping of the second special symbol consisting of numbers, symbols, etc. The special symbol 2 display device then displays the result of the second special symbol lottery by the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
Here, the display of the first special pattern on the special pattern 1 display device and the display of the performance patterns z1 and z2 in the performance pattern display area A correspond to the time when the variable display starts, the time when the stopped display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped displayed pattern.
In addition, the display of the second special pattern on the special pattern 2 display device and the display of the performance patterns z1 and z2 in the performance pattern display area B are respectively associated with the time when the variable display starts, the time when the stopped display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped displayed pattern.
Then, when the first special pattern (stop pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 1 display device becomes a specific pattern (jackpot pattern), or when the second special pattern (stop pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 2 display device becomes a specific pattern (jackpot pattern), a jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is created.
In addition, when the first special pattern (stop pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 1 display device becomes a specific pattern (small win pattern), or when the second special pattern (stop pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 2 display device becomes a specific pattern (small win pattern), a small win game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is created.
The normal symbol display device is capable of displaying the fluctuations and stopping of normal symbols consisting of numbers, symbols, etc. The normal symbol display device then displays the results of the normal symbol lottery based on the normal symbol that is stopped. When the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device becomes a specific symbol (a normal symbol winning symbol), a normal symbol winning game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is created.

The special pattern 1 pending display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery results of the first special pattern lottery has been pending (number of special pattern 1 pending).
The special pattern 2 reserved display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery results of the second special pattern lottery has been reserved (special pattern 2 reserved number).
The regular symbol reserved display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery has been reserved (number of reserved regular symbols).
The round display device displays the number of rounds of play executed during a big win game state or a small win game state (the type of big win game state or the type of small win game state).
The right-hand shot display device displays the path (left-hand path or right-hand path) along which the game ball should be shot.
The probability variation display device displays the game status when the power is restored (whether a special chart high probability state is occurring or a special chart low probability state is occurring).
The time-saving display device displays the current game status (time-saving control is running or stopped).

One or more movable body units (not shown) are also provided in the pachinko machine 1. In this embodiment, one or more movable body units are provided in the integrated door unit 4, and one or more movable body units are provided in the game board unit 10.
Each movable body unit of the integrated door unit 4 is disposed on the front of the decorative portion 4b, on the top surface of the tray unit 5, etc., and is capable of performing predetermined performance operations.
Each movable body unit of the game board unit 10 is attached to the front side of the set board. Specifically, each movable body unit is disposed in the space (hereinafter referred to as the "performance space") between the game board 11 and the main image display device 31 (display screen 31a). Each movable body unit is capable of performing a predetermined performance action in the performance space.
Each movable body unit includes a performance member, a drive mechanism, a drive source, and a position detection sensor 26 (see FIG. 3). In this embodiment, a motor 23 (see FIG. 3) is used as the drive source. The motor 23 is a stepping motor. Note that a solenoid may also be used as the drive source.
The effect member can be displaced in a predetermined direction by a drive mechanism. Specifically, the effect member can be displaced to a plurality of positions including an initial position and an effect position. The effect member is driven (displaced) by a motor 23.

The position detection sensor 26 is composed of a photosensor or the like. The position detection sensor 26 detects the position of the performance component. Specifically, the position detection sensor 26 includes a light-projecting unit and a light-receiving unit that receives light projected from the light-projecting unit. The position detection sensor 26 outputs a detection signal to the performance control board 300 in response to the light-receiving unit receiving (detecting) the light projected from the light-projecting unit. On the other hand, the position detection sensor 26 stops outputting the detection signal to the performance control board 300 when the light-receiving unit does not receive (detect) the light projected from the light-projecting unit.
Furthermore, a shielding plate is provided at a predetermined position on the performance member. When the performance member is placed in its initial position, the shielding plate is placed between the light-emitting portion and light-receiving portion of the position detection sensor 26, blocking light from entering the light-receiving portion. As a result, when the performance member is placed in its initial position, the output of a detection signal from the position detection sensor 26 to the performance control board 300 is stopped. On the other hand, when the performance member is not placed in its initial position, a detection signal is output from the position detection sensor 26 to the performance control board 300.
This makes it possible for the performance control board 300 to detect whether or not the performance component is positioned in the initial position based on the input status of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 26.

The pachinko machine 1 is also provided with detection sensors that detect various abnormal conditions.
In this embodiment, the detection sensors provided include a glass frame opening sensor 107, an inner frame opening sensor 108, a vibration detection sensor 113, a radio wave detection sensor 114, a magnetic detection sensor 115, and the like.
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects the opening of the integrated door unit 4 relative to the inner frame unit 3. Then, in response to the opening of the integrated door unit 4 relative to the inner frame unit 3, the glass frame opening sensor 107 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the dispensing control board 400.
The inner frame opening sensor 108 detects the opening of the inner frame unit 3 relative to the outer frame unit 2. Then, in response to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 relative to the outer frame unit 2, the inner frame opening sensor 108 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the dispensing control board 400.
The vibration detection sensor 113 detects vibrations of the game board 11. In this embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is disposed on the game board 11. Then, the vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detecting vibrations of the game board 11.
The radio wave detection sensors 114 detect radio waves generated around the gaming board 11. In this embodiment, two radio wave detection sensors 114 are arranged on the gaming board 11. Each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of radio waves.
The magnetic detection sensors 115 detect magnetism generated around the gaming board 11. In this embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is provided in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). Two magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided in the gaming board 11. The magnetic detection sensor 115 provided in the inner frame unit 3 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the detection of magnetism. Each magnetic detection sensor 115 provided on the gaming board 11 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of magnetism.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is an address map of the memory area used by the CPU 210.
The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with various control boards.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 3, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with multiple control boards, such as a main control board 200, a performance control board 300, a payout control board 400, a power supply board 600 that supplies power (electricity) to each of the control boards 200, 300, 400, etc., a driver board 310, a sub-connection board 320, an illumination board 700, etc.
The control boards 200, 300, 400, and 600 are independent (separate) circuit boards, and are housed in individual board cases (such as the main board case 250, which will be described later).
The main control board 200 and the presentation control board 300 are included in the game board unit 10. Specifically, the main control board 200 and the presentation control board 300 are attached to the back side of the game board 11.
The dispensing control board 400 is included in the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the dispensing control board 400 is attached to the back side of the inner frame provided in the inner frame unit 3.

(Configuration of main control board 200)
First, the configuration of the main control board 200 will be described.
The main control board 200 controls the progress of the game.
The main control board 200 is composed of a one-chip microcomputer, a clock generating circuit 202, a random number generating circuit 203, an input port 204, an output port 205, a performance display device 206, a RAM clear switch 207, a setting key switch 208, a sink driver 240, source drivers 250a, 250b, etc.
The one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, etc.

The main control board 200 is configured to include a memory area used by the CPU 210. As shown in Fig. 4, the memory area used by the CPU 210 is configured to include a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230.
Here, in FIG. 4, addresses for specifying memory areas are shown in hexadecimal numbers ("H" indicates hexadecimal numbers).

The ROM 220 (memory area of the ROM 220) is configured to include a used area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and an unused area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
The used area m1 is configured to include a program area, an unused area, and a data area. The program area stores a program (program code) for controlling the progress of the game. The data area stores data (program data) for controlling the progress of the game. Note that the used area m1 may be configured without including the unused area.
The unused area m2 includes a program area and a data area.
The program area stores a program (program code) for executing processing related to tests defined in the Gaming Machine Regulations, and a program (program code) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 (specifically, calculating the base ratio). The data area stores data (program data) for executing processing related to tests defined in the Gaming Machine Regulations, and data (program data) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
In addition to the used area m1 and unused area m2, the ROM 220 also has an unused area, a ROM comment area, a program management area, and the like.
The ROM comment area stores arbitrary data such as the program title, version, etc. On the other hand, the program management area stores information necessary for the CPU 210 to execute various programs.
In addition, the ROM 220 has an unused area m3 of a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 16 bytes or more) between the used area m1 and the unused area m2, thereby clearly defining the boundary between the used area m1 and the unused area m2.

The RAM 230 (memory area of the RAM 230) is configured to include a used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and a non-used area M2 (F300H to F3FFH).
The used area M1 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. Note that the used area M1 does not have to be configured to include an unused area.
Specifically, the work area is composed of a setting value area, a gaming machine status flag area, a checksum area, a backup flag area, an error-related area, a normal game-related area 1, and a normal game-related area 2.
The setting value area stores setting values. The gaming machine status flag area stores gaming machine status flags. The checksum area stores checksums. The backup flag area stores backup flags. The error-related area stores information related to errors. The normal game-related area 1 stores subcommand pointers and the like. The normal game-related area 2 stores input/output data for the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counters, timer counters, etc.), flags for managing lottery results and gaming status, etc. In particular, the normal game-related area 2 includes an area (a game information storage area described later) for storing game information acquired in response to the input of detection signals from the special symbol 1 start port switch 101, the special symbol 2 start port switches 102a and 102b, and the gate switch 104, a special symbol 1 display pattern counter, a special symbol 2 display pattern counter, a normal symbol display pattern counter, etc.
The unused area M2 is configured to include a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing processing related to a test defined by the gaming machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing processing related to a test defined by the gaming machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206).
Specifically, the work area includes a performance display related area, which is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
Additionally, an unused area M3 of a predetermined number of bytes (16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area M1 and the unused area M2 in the RAM 230. This clarifies the boundary between the used area M1 and the unused area M2.

In this embodiment, processing based on a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1 is permitted to refer to data stored in the non-use area M2.
On the other hand, data stored in the non-use area M2 is prohibited from being rewritten (changed) by processing based on the program stored in the use area m1 (a program for controlling the progress of the game).
In addition, in processing based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests specified in the gaming machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), it is permitted to refer to data stored in the used area M1.
On the other hand, it is prohibited for the data stored in the use area M1 to be rewritten (changed) by processing based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests specified in the gaming machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206).
The game on the pachinko machine 1 can be progressed (completed) by the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.

The clock generation circuit 202 generates a clock (synchronization signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 MHz in this embodiment) and outputs this clock to the CPU 210 and the random number generation circuit 203 .
The random number generating circuit 203 is configured to include a first loop counter that generates a winning random number for the normal symbol lottery, a second loop counter that generates a jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery, a third loop counter that generates a jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery, and a fourth loop counter that generates a reach group random number.
The first loop counter generates a winning random number for the normal symbol lottery by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. In this embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 μs (1 s/12 MHz = 0.083 μs).
The second loop counter generates a jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. In this embodiment, the value of the second loop counter is updated every 0.083 μs (1 s/12 MHz = 0.083 μs).

The third loop counter generates a jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery by updating the value of the loop counter by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. In this embodiment, the value of the third loop counter is updated every 0.083 μs (1 s/12 MHz = 0.083 μs).
The fourth loop counter generates a reach group random number by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 10006) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (once per 32 divisions of the clock frequency). In this embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 μs (32 s/12 MHz = 2.666 μs).

The input port 204 is configured to include a plurality of input ports (in this embodiment, input port 0 to input port 3).
Input port 0 receives detection signals from the glass frame opening sensor 107, the inner frame opening sensor 108, the vibration detection sensor 113, the radio wave detection sensor 114, and the magnetic detection sensor 115.
To the input port 1, a RAM clear signal from a RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from a setting key switch 208, etc. are input.
Input port 2 receives detection signals from each count switch 103a, 103b, a detection signal from the right prize entry switch 105, a detection signal from the left prize entry switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, and a detection signal from the other radio wave detection sensor 114.
The input port 3 receives detection signals from the special diagram 1 start port switch 101, detection signals from each special diagram 2 start port switch 102a, 102b, detection signals from the gate switch 104, detection signals from the V area switch 110, etc.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor (detection signal). In the reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor, one bit of data is set that indicates the reception state of the detection signal from that switch/sensor.
Specifically, the receiving memory area corresponding to each switch/sensor is set to "1" when a detection signal is input from the switch/sensor (high level), and is set to "0" when a detection signal is not input from the switch/sensor (low level).

The output port 205 is configured to include a plurality of output ports (output port 0 to output port 4 in this embodiment).
Output port 0 outputs data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60. The data signals output from output port 0 are then input to the source driver 250a.
Output port 1 outputs common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206. The common signals output from output port 1 are input to the sink driver 240.
The output port 2 outputs an external signal. At this time, the external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer via the payout control board 400 and the external terminal board 450.
Output port 3 outputs a control signal for controlling the operation of the normal electric role solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the operation of each large prize opening solenoid 65a, 65b, a control signal for controlling the V-area solenoid 66, etc.
Output port 4 outputs data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206. The data signals output from output port 4 are then input to source driver 250b.

The main control board 200 is configured to include a command output port 1 and a command output port 2. The CPU 210 transmits a control command (sub-command) from the command output port 1 to the performance control board 300, and transmits a control command (payout command) from the command output port 2 to the payout control board 400.
Each of the command output ports 1 and 2 has a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), and a transmission shift register (not shown).
The transmission data register outputs the control command input based on the subcommand transmission process (step S2-4) described later to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is made up of multiple registers and is capable of storing multiple control commands. The FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the order in which they were input.
The transmitting shift register performs parallel-to-serial conversion on the control commands input from the FIFO buffer and transmits them as serial data to the performance control board 300 or the payout control board 400.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is configured as a light-emitting element (in this embodiment, an LED). The performance display device 206 is arranged on the back side of the gaming board 11, so that it cannot be seen by the player.
As will be described later, the gaming machine states (hereinafter referred to as "gaming machine states") of the pachinko machine 1 are defined as a playable state, a setting change state, a setting check state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, and a backup abnormal state. The information displayed on the performance display device 206 changes depending on the gaming machine state that has occurred.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include four (four-digit) display units (not shown). Each display unit is made up of eight lighting elements. That is, each display unit is made up of a 7-segment LED capable of displaying numbers, symbols, etc., and a dot-segment LED capable of displaying dots such as decimal points.
Specifically, the performance display device 206 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LEDs 33 to 64). In the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 are the display unit for the first digit, LEDs 41 to 48 are the display unit for the second digit, LEDs 49 to 56 are the display unit for the third digit, and LEDs 57 to 64 are the display unit for the fourth digit.

During the playable state, the game can proceed. During the playable state, the performance display device 206 displays the base ratio.
In this embodiment, while a playable state is occurring, the performance display device 206 alternately displays the first base ratio and the second base ratio every predetermined time (5.0 [s] in this embodiment).
The "first base ratio" is the base ratio of the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the present time).
The "second base ratio" is the base ratio of the previous section (the final base ratio calculated for the previous section).
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the top two digits of the four-digit display section display information to identify the type of base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio), and the bottom two digits display a number indicating the base ratio (percentage).

When the setting change state is occurring, the setting values can be changed. During the setting change state, the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the top three digits of the four-digit display section display information indicating that a setting change state is occurring (specifically, the top one digit displays "r", the second top digit displays "n.", and the third top digit displays "-"), and the bottom one digit displays a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area.
During the setting confirmation state, the setting values can be confirmed. During the setting confirmation state, the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the top three digits of the four-digit display section display information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring (specifically, the top one digit displays "r", the second top digit displays "n.", and the top three digit displays no information), and the bottom one digit displays a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area.

During a game stop state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state), game progress becomes impossible. During a game stop state, an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the top three digits of the four-digit display section display information indicating that a game stop state is occurring (specifically, the top digit displays "E", the second top digit displays "r.", and the top digit displays no display), and the bottom digit displays a number indicating an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred (setting abnormality state, RAM abnormality state, or backup abnormality state).

The RAM clear switch 207 is a tactile switch. That is, the RAM clear switch 207 includes an operation portion that can be pressed. When the operation portion is pressed, the RAM clear switch 207 outputs a RAM clear signal to input port 1.
The setting key switch 208 is a key lock switch. That is, the setting key switch 208 is configured to include an operating unit with a keyhole. The operating unit is unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole, and can be rotated (switched) from the OFF state to the ON state. When the operating unit of the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, it outputs a detection signal to input port 1.

The sink driver 240 controls the output of common signals to the display devices 60 and 206 in accordance with the common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) output from the output port 1 .
The source driver 250a controls the output of data signals to the main display device 60 in accordance with the data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") output from output port 0.
The source driver 250 b controls the output of data signals to the performance display device 206 in accordance with the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 4 .
As a result, the source driver 250 a and the sink driver 240 control the lighting of the lighting elements (LED 1 to LED 32 ) included in the main display device 60 .
Furthermore, the source driver 250 b and the sink driver 240 control the lighting of the lighting elements (LED 33 to LED 64 ) included in the performance display device 206 .

The main control board 200 also includes a test signal output circuit (not shown).
In the test signal output process (step S4-24) described below, the CPU 210 generates test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, execution state of time-saving control, probability state of special symbol lottery, etc.) and stores the generated test signal in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from a predetermined output port. The test signal output from the predetermined output port is then input to an interface board of a test computer (not shown) via a test signal output circuit.
In addition, in the main control board 200, detection signals from the special chart 1 start port switch 101, detection signals from each special chart 2 start port switch 102a, 102b, detection signals from the gate switch 104, detection signals from each count switch 103a, 103b, detection signals from the right prize port switch 105, detection signals from the left prize port switch 106, detection signals from the out switch 109, etc. are input to the input port 204 and input to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit.
Furthermore, in the main control board 200, control signals for controlling the operation of each solenoid (normal electric role solenoid 64, large prize opening solenoids 65a, 65b, V-area solenoid 66, etc.) output from output port 3 are input to each solenoid 64, 65a, 65b, 66, and also input to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit.

(Configuration of dispensing control board 400)
Next, the configuration of the dispensing control board 400 will be described.
The payout control board 400 controls the launch of game balls into the game area 30 and the payout of game balls.
The dispensing control board 400 is configured to include a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, a one-chip microcomputer is configured to include a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, etc.
The payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 based on the control command received from the main control board 200 and the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit.
Furthermore, the payout control board 400 controls the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 based on the detection signal input from the launch volume 410. Specifically, it controls the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 so that the game ball is launched into the game area 30 with a strength according to the detection signal input from the launch volume 410.

(Configuration of performance control board 300)
Next, the configuration of the performance control board 300 will be described.
The performance control board 300 controls the performance.
The performance control board 300 is configured to include a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, registers, semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, a one-chip microcomputer is configured to include a CPU, ROM, RAM, VDP, sound processor, lighting controller, motor controller, etc.
Based on control commands received from the main control board 200, the performance control board 300 controls the display of performance images on various image display devices 31, 32, the lighting of various lamps 20, 21, the output of sound from various speakers 22, and the driving of motors 23 that drive various movable body units.

The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores programs related to the progress of the performance, data necessary for the progress of the performance, etc.
The RAM of the performance control board 300 temporarily stores control commands received from the main control board 200, data for performing arithmetic processing, etc.
The CPU of the performance control board 300 determines the performance content to be executed based on the control command received from the main control board 200, and sets a performance program (performance control table) corresponding to the determined performance content.
The VDP generates display control data (display control signals) in accordance with a performance program (performance control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated display control data to the various image display devices 31 and 32 .
The sound processor generates sound control data (sound control signals) in accordance with a performance program (performance control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated sound control data to a digital audio power amplifier (not shown). The digital audio power amplifier then generates control signals corresponding to the various speakers 22 based on the sound control data input from the sound processor, and outputs the generated control signals to the various speakers 22 via the sub-connection board 320.
The lighting controller generates lamp control data (lamp control signal) according to the performance program (performance control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated lamp control data to each of the driver board 310 and the sub-connection board 320.
The motor controller generates motor control data (motor control signals) according to the performance program (performance control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated motor control data to each of the driver board 310 and the sub-connection board 320.

(Configuration of driver board 310 and sub-connection board 320)
Next, the configurations of the driver board 310 and the sub-connection board 320 will be described.
The driver board 310 includes a motor driver (not shown) and a lamp driver (not shown).
The motor control data output from the performance control board 300 is input to the motor driver. Then, the motor driver controls the output of excitation signals (drive currents) to the various motors 23 (such as the motors 23 that make up the movable body units) arranged in the game board unit 10 in accordance with the motor control data input from the performance control board 300.
The lamp control data output from the performance control board 300 is input to the lamp driver. Then, the lamp driver controls the driving (light emission) of the light-emitting element groups of each system that make up the panel lamp 21 in accordance with the lamp control data input from the performance control board 300.
The sub-connection board 320 is configured to include a motor driver (not shown).
The motor control data output from the performance control board 300 is input to the motor driver. Then, the motor driver controls the output of excitation signals (drive currents) to the various motors 23 (such as the motors 23 that make up the movable body units) arranged in the integrated door unit 4 in accordance with the motor control data input from the performance control board 300.
The lamp control data output from the performance control board 300 is relayed through the sub-connection board 320 and input to the illumination board 700.

(Configuration of illumination board 700)
Next, the configuration of the illumination board 700 will be described.
The illumination board 700 is composed of a board (printed board) 710 on which a wiring pattern (circuit) is formed, various electronic components 720 mounted on the board 710, and screw members 730 for fixing the board 710 to a base member or the like.
The substrate 710 may be either a single-sided substrate with a wiring pattern formed on only one side, or a double-sided substrate with wiring patterns formed on both sides.
In this embodiment, the electronic component 720 includes a light emitting element (light source) 721, an IC (IC chip/integrated circuit) 722, and a connector 723. Here, the electronic component 720 may also include a resistor, a capacitor, a capacitor, etc.
In this embodiment, an LED is used as the light-emitting element 721. The light-emitting element 721 may be either a top-view chip LED (an LED that emits light in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the substrate 710) or a side-view chip LED (an LED that emits light in a direction along the surface of the substrate 710). The light-emitting element 721 has a predetermined irradiation range ir defined as the range over which it emits light. Here, the irradiation range ir (irradiation angle) refers to the range over which direct light emitted from the light-emitting element 721 reaches, and does not include the range over which only indirect light (reflected light) reaches.
The IC 722 includes a driver IC that controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element 721 .
The connector 723 includes a connector for connecting a wire that inputs a control signal (such as lamp control data) to the IC 722, and a connector for connecting a wire that inputs power to drive the light emitting element 721. The connector 723 may be either a top-type connector (a connector that draws out the wire w in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the substrate 710) or a side-type connector (a connector that draws out the wire w in a direction along the surface of the substrate 710).
The screw member 730 includes a head 731 and a threaded portion (shank) 732 extending from the bottom surface of the head 731 .

In this embodiment, the frame lamp 20 is composed of one or more light-emitting elements 721 mounted on the illumination board 700.
The lamp control data output from the performance control board 300 is relayed by the sub-connection board 320 and input to an IC (lamp driver) 721 of the illumination board 700. Then, the IC 721 controls the driving (light emission) of the light-emitting elements 721 that make up the frame lamp 20 in accordance with the lamp control data input from the performance control board 300.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, on the board 710, among the components constituting the board 710, components other than the light-emitting element 721 are arranged so as not to be within the irradiation range ir of the light from the light-emitting element 721. Specifically, on the board 710, the IC 722, the connector 723, and the screw member 730 (head 731) are arranged so as not to be within the irradiation range ir of the light from the light-emitting element 721.
This prevents the progression of light emitted from light-emitting element 721 from being obstructed by electronic component 720 and screw member 730 (head 731), and prevents the range of light emitted from light-emitting element 721 from being narrowed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the performance of the light emitted from light-emitting element 721.
An example will be described below in which, among the components constituting the substrate 710, components other than the light emitting element 721 are arranged so as not to be within the irradiation range ir of the light from the light emitting element 721.

Example 1
First, the configuration of the illumination board 700 according to the first embodiment will be described.
Fig. 59 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the illumination board 700 according to Example 1. Fig. 60 is a side view showing the relationship between the light irradiation range ir of the light emitting element 721 in the illumination board 700 according to Example 1 and the wiring w drawn out from the connector 723. Here, Fig. 59(a) shows the front side of the illumination board 700, and Fig. 59(b) shows the back side of the illumination board 700.
In the decorative lighting board 700 according to the first embodiment, the board 710 is configured as a double-sided board with wiring patterns on both sides. Furthermore, in the decorative lighting board 700 according to the first embodiment, the light-emitting element 721 is configured as a top-view chip LED. Furthermore, in the decorative lighting board 700 according to the first embodiment, the connector 723 is configured as a top-type connector.

As shown in Figure 59, in the illuminated board 700 of Example 1, of the electronic components 720 mounted on the board 710, the side on which the light-emitting element 721 is mounted is different from the side on which the other electronic components excluding the light-emitting element 721 are mounted.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 59(a), of the electronic components 720 mounted on the substrate 710, a light-emitting element 721 is mounted on the front surface of the substrate 710. On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 59(b), of the electronic components 720 mounted on the substrate 710, the other electronic components (specifically, an IC 722 and a connector 723) excluding the light-emitting element 721 are mounted on the back surface of the substrate 710.
This makes it possible to more reliably prevent other electronic components (specifically, the IC 722 and the connector 723 ) from entering the irradiation range ir of the light emitted by the light emitting element 721 .

Here, in a configuration in which the light-emitting element 721 and the other electronic components excluding the light-emitting element 721 (specifically, the IC 722 and the connector 723) are mounted on different surfaces of the substrate 710, if the region in which the light-emitting element 721 is arranged overlaps with the region in which the other electronic components (specifically, the IC 722 and the connector 723) are arranged as viewed from a direction perpendicular to the substrate 710, the heat generated by driving the light-emitting element 721 may damage the other electronic components (specifically, the IC 722 and the connector 723), or the heat generated by driving the other electronic components (specifically, the IC 722 and the connector 723) may damage the light-emitting element 721. In other words, if the other electronic components (specifically, the IC 722 and the connector 723) are arranged in the region directly behind the light-emitting element 721, the heat generated by driving the light-emitting element 721 may damage the other electronic components (specifically, the IC 722 and the connector 723). Furthermore, if the light-emitting element 721 is placed in the area directly behind other electronic components (specifically, IC 722 and connector 723), there is a risk that the light-emitting element 721 will be damaged due to heat generated by the operation of the other electronic components (specifically, IC 722 and connector 723).
Therefore, in the illumination board 700 according to the first embodiment, the area where the light emitting element 721 is arranged does not overlap with the area where other electronic components (specifically, the IC 722 and the connector 723) are arranged when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the board 710. In particular, the light emitting element 721 is not mounted in the area R2 directly behind the area R1 where the IC 722, which generates a large amount of heat when driven, is mounted.
This makes it possible to prevent other electronic components from being damaged due to heat generated when the light-emitting element 721 is driven, and also makes it possible to prevent the light-emitting element 721 from being damaged due to heat generated when other electronic components (specifically, IC 722 and connector 723) are driven.

In the illumination board 700 according to Example 1, the screw head 731 of the screw member 730 is arranged on the same surface (front) as the surface on which the light-emitting element 721 is mounted. The distance between the screw member 730 and the light-emitting element 721 is set so that the screw head 731 does not fall within the light irradiation range ir of the light-emitting element 721. If the distance between the screw member 730 and the light-emitting element 721 is less than 3 mm, static electricity generated in the screw member 730 may affect the light-emitting element 721, potentially damaging the light-emitting element 721. Therefore, in this example, the distance between the screw member 730 (screw head 731) and the light-emitting element 721 is set to 3 mm or more.
In addition, in the illuminated board 700 of Example 1, the screw head 731 of the screw member 730 can also be positioned on a surface (back surface) different from the surface on which the light-emitting element 721 is mounted, thereby more reliably preventing the screw head 731 from entering the light irradiation range ir of the light-emitting element 721.

Furthermore, in the illumination board 700 of Example 1, the light-emitting element 721 is configured as a top-view chip LED, and the connector 723 is configured as a top-type connector. As a result, as shown in Figure 60, the direction in which the light-emitting element 721 emits light (upward as shown in Figure 60) and the direction in which the wiring w is pulled out from the connector 723 (downward as shown in Figure 60) are opposite (opposite directions). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the wiring w pulled out from the connector 723 from entering the light irradiation range ir of the light-emitting element 721.

Example 2
Next, the configuration of the illumination board 700 according to the second embodiment will be described.
Fig. 61 is a side view showing the configuration of the illumination board 700 according to Example 2. Fig. 62 is a plan view showing the configuration of the illumination board 700 according to Example 2. Fig. 63 is a side view showing the configuration of the illumination board 700 according to a modified example of Example 2. Here, Fig. 62(b) is an enlarged view of region R3 shown in Fig. 62(a).
In the decorative lighting board 700 according to the second embodiment, the board 710 is configured as a single-sided board having a wiring pattern on one side thereof. The light-emitting element 721 in the decorative lighting board 700 according to the second embodiment is configured as a top-view chip LED. Furthermore, the decorative lighting board 700 according to the second embodiment uses a top-type connector and a side-type connector as the connector 723.

61, in the illumination board 700 according to the second embodiment, among the components arranged on the board 710, the surface on which the light-emitting element 721 is arranged is the same as the surface on which the other components except for the light-emitting element 721 are arranged. Specifically, the light-emitting element 721, the IC 722, the connector 723, and the screw member 730 (screw head 731) are arranged on the front surface of the board 710.
In the illumination board 700 according to the second embodiment, the IC 722, the connector 723, and the screw member 730 (head 731) are arranged on the board 710 so as not to be within the irradiation range ir of the light emitted by the light emitting element 721. In this embodiment, the wiring w drawn out from the connector 723 is also arranged so as not to be within the irradiation range ir of the light emitted by the light emitting element 721.
In this embodiment, the distance between the light emitting element 721 and the other components (IC 722, connector 723, wiring w, head 731 of screw member 730, etc.) is set so that the other components (except the light emitting element 721, IC 722, connector 723, wiring w, head 731 of screw member 730, etc.) constituting the substrate 710 do not fall within the irradiation range ir of the light emitted by the light emitting element 721. In particular, the distance between the light emitting element 721 and the other components (IC 722, connector 723, wiring w, head 731 of screw member 730, etc.) that are taller (components that are higher from the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 710) is increased.
62 , the distance between the light-emitting element 721 and each of the electronic components (e.g., IC 722, connector 723) of the electronic component 720, excluding the light-emitting element 721, is set to 1 mm or more. Furthermore, the distance x between the screw head 731 and the light-emitting element 721 is set to be greater than the distance y between the IC 722 and the light-emitting element 721. In particular, the distance between the screw head 731 and the light-emitting element 721 is set to 3 mm or more. This prevents the IC 722, connector 723, and screw member 730 (head 731) from entering the irradiation range ir of light from the light-emitting element 721 on the substrate 710, while also suppressing static electricity generated in the screw member 730 from affecting the light-emitting element 721.

Here, if the light-emitting element 721 and the connector 723 are configured to be mounted on the same surface of the substrate 710, the wiring w drawn out from the connector 723 will be particularly likely to enter the irradiation range ir of the light emitted by the light-emitting element 721.
Therefore, as shown in Figure 63, in the illumination board 700 of Example 2, the light-emitting element 721 can be configured as a side-view type chip LED, and the connector 723 can be configured as a side-type connector, and the direction in which the light-emitting element 721 emits light (to the right as shown in Figure 63) and the direction in which the wiring w is pulled out from the connector 723 (to the left as shown in Figure 63) can be configured to be opposite (opposite directions).
This makes it possible to more reliably prevent the wiring w drawn out from the connector 723 from entering the irradiation range ir of the light from the light emitting element 721.

Example 3
Next, the configuration of the illumination board 700 according to the third embodiment will be described.
FIG. 64 is a side view showing the configuration of an illumination board 700 according to the third embodiment.
In the decorative lighting board 700 according to the third embodiment, the board 710 is configured as a single-sided board having a wiring pattern on one side thereof. The light-emitting element 721 in the decorative lighting board 700 according to the third embodiment is configured as a top-view chip LED. The connector 723 in the decorative lighting board 700 according to the third embodiment is configured as a top-type connector.

64, in the illumination board 700 according to the third embodiment, among the components arranged on the board 710, the surface on which the light-emitting element 721 is mounted is the same as the surface on which the other components except for the light-emitting element 721 are arranged. Specifically, the light-emitting element 721, the IC 722, the connector 723, and the screw member 730 (screw head 731) are arranged on the front surface of the board 710.
In particular, in the illumination board 700 according to Example 3, of the components arranged on the board 710, the light-emitting element 721 is positioned higher relative to the surface (mounting surface) of the board 710 than the other components (specifically, the IC 722, the connector 723 (wiring w), and the screw head 731). In other words, the height of the top surface (the surface onto which light is emitted) of the light-emitting element 721 relative to the board 710 is higher than the height of the top surfaces of the other components (specifically, the IC 722, the connector 723 (wiring w), and the screw head 731) relative to the board 710.
In this embodiment, the light emitting element 721 is mounted on the front surface of the substrate 710 via a base member (case) 721a. The light emitting element 721 is disposed on the top surface of the base member 721a. This makes the height (position) of the top surface (surface onto which light is emitted) of the light emitting element 721 relative to the substrate 710 higher than the height (position) of the top surfaces of other components (specifically, the IC 722, the connector 723 (wiring w), and the screw head 731) relative to the substrate 710.
Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent other electronic components (specifically, IC 722, connector 723 (wiring w), and screw head 731) from entering the light irradiation range ir of the light emitting element 721.

(Regarding gaming machine status)
In the pachinko machine 1, six states (specifically, playable state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, and backup abnormal state) are defined as gaming machine states.
A gaming machine state flag area is provided in the RAM 230 of the main control board 200. In the gaming machine state flag area, a value corresponding to one of six gaming machine states (specifically, playable state, setting change state, setting check state, setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, and backup abnormal state) is stored (set) as a gaming machine state flag. Then, in the pachinko machine 1, a gaming machine state corresponding to the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is generated.

The "playable state" is a gaming machine state in which game progress is possible.
While the game is enabled, the execution of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is permitted, thereby allowing the game (normal game and special game) to proceed.
Furthermore, while the game is in a playable state, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, information relating to the game is displayed on the main display device 60.

The "setting change state" is a gaming machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 can be changed.
The setting change state occurs when the setting change conditions are met. In this embodiment, the setting change conditions are met when a detection signal is input from the inner frame open sensor 108, a detection signal is input from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal is input from the RAM clear switch 207 at power-on. In other words, the setting change state occurs when the inner frame unit 3 is open at power-on, the key switch 208 is turned ON, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed.
While the setting change state is occurring, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is thereby stopped.
Furthermore, while the setting change state is occurring, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
Furthermore, while the setting change state is occurring, it is possible to change the setting values stored in the setting value area by pressing the RAM clear switch 207. Then, when the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the setting change state is replaced by a playable state, whereby the setting values stored in the setting value area are confirmed.

The "setting confirmation state" is a gaming machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 can be confirmed.
The setting confirmation state is established when the setting confirmation conditions are met. In this embodiment, the setting confirmation conditions are established when, at power-on, a detection signal is input from the inner frame open sensor 108, a detection signal is input from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal is not input from the RAM clear switch 207. In other words, at power-on, the setting confirmation state is established if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is turned ON, and the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed.
During the setting confirmation state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Furthermore, while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area are displayed on the performance display device 206. This allows the setting values stored in the setting value area to be confirmed. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
It should be noted that while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area cannot be changed.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting confirmation state is replaced with a playable state.

The "setting abnormality state" is the state of the gaming machine in which a setting abnormality has occurred.
The abnormal setting state occurs when, during a playable state, it is determined that the setting value set in the setting value area is not within a specified range.
During the occurrence of the abnormal setting state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is thereby stopped.
Furthermore, when a setting abnormality occurs, an error code indicating the occurrence of the setting abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
To recover from the abnormal setting state, it is necessary to turn the power off and on again to cause a setting change state.

"RAM abnormal state" is the state of the gaming machine in which a RAM abnormality has occurred.
The RAM abnormal state occurs when it is determined that a read/write abnormality has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
During the occurrence of the RAM abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Furthermore, when a RAM abnormality occurs, an error code specifying the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
To recover from the RAM abnormal state, it is necessary to perform a power-off and power-on to cause a setting change state.

The "backup abnormality state" is the state of the gaming machine in which a backup abnormality has occurred.
The backup abnormality state occurs when it is determined that a backup abnormality (specifically, an abnormality in the backup flag or an abnormality in the checksum) has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
During the occurrence of the backup abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Furthermore, when a backup abnormality occurs, an error code specifying the occurrence of a backup abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
To recover from the backup abnormality state, it is necessary to perform a power-off and power-on to cause a setting change state.

(Regarding setting values)
Next, the setting values (setting information) set in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
The "setting value" is information that specifies the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery). In this embodiment, the setting value is defined as a value between "0" and "5".
A set value area is provided in the RAM 230 of the main control board 200. In the set value area, one of values "0" to "5" is stored (set) as a set value. The probability of winning the special symbol lottery is determined to be the probability corresponding to the value set in the set value area.
In this embodiment, the probability of winning a "big win" through the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery and second special pattern lottery) changes according to the value set in the set value area. On the other hand, the probability of winning a "small win" through the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery and second special pattern lottery) does not change according to the value set in the set value area. Note that the probability of winning a "small win" through the special pattern lottery may also be configured to change according to the value set in the set value area, just like the probability of winning a "big win" through the special pattern lottery.
The winning probability of the special pattern lottery corresponding to each setting value (probability of winning the "jackpot") is, in order from highest to lowest, as follows: winning probability corresponding to setting value = "5", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "4", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "3", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "2", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "1", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "0" (winning probability "high" → winning probability "low").

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to change (select) the setting value stored in the setting value area while the setting change state is occurring. Here, the change of the setting value is executed by the manager of the pachinko machine 1 (such as an employee of the gaming parlor where the pachinko machine 1 is installed).
That is, as described above, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, a setting change state is generated.
While the setting change state is occurring, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, each time the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the setting value stored in the setting value area is changed. At this time, if the setting value set in the setting value area is changed, the setting value displayed on the performance display device 206 is also changed accordingly.
When the key switch 208 is turned to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the setting change state is replaced by a playable state, whereby the setting value stored in the setting value area is confirmed.

(Base ratio)
In the pachinko machine 1, while a playable state is occurring, a base ratio (base value) is calculated by the CPU 210. In this embodiment, the base ratio is calculated only while a predetermined play state is occurring (specifically, while a special low probability state is occurring and while time-saving control is stopped).
Then, while the game is in a playable state, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206.
The "base ratio" is information calculated based on the number of game balls shot into the game area 30 and the number of prize balls paid out in response to game balls entering predetermined entry ports (in this embodiment, the starting ports 51 to 53 and other entry ports 56, 57a to 57c). Specifically, the base ratio is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts (number of prize balls paid out) to the number of out balls (number of game balls shot out).

In this embodiment, the base ratio for each predetermined interval (period) is calculated. The predetermined interval is defined as an interval in which a predetermined number of out balls (60,000 balls in this embodiment) are detected (discharged). That is, each interval begins at the end of the previous interval and ends when the number of out balls detected during the current interval reaches the predetermined number (60,000 balls). The CPU 210 then calculates the base ratio as needed (in real time) during each interval.
Note that a predetermined time may be defined as the predetermined interval, and the CPU 210 may calculate the base ratio for each predetermined time.
The "number of out balls" refers to the number of out balls. "Out balls" refer to game balls that have been discharged from the game area 30. Specifically, out balls are game balls that have passed through the discharge path (game balls detected by the out switch 109).
It is also possible to use the gaming ball discharged from outlet 58 as the out ball. Specifically, out switch 109 may be configured to detect only gaming balls discharged from outlet 58, and the gaming ball detected by out switch 109 may be used as the out ball.
The "number of payouts" refers to the total number of prize balls paid out in response to game balls entering the starting holes 51 to 53 and the other winning holes 56, 57a to 57c.

(Regarding game status)
Next, the game states defined in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the contents of the game state.
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute time-saving control as auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
During the execution of the time-saving control, the probability of winning a "normal symbol" is improved by the normal symbol lottery described below compared to when the time-saving control is stopped. In other words, when the time-saving control is stopped, the normal symbol is in a low probability state, and when the time-saving control is being executed, the normal symbol is in a high probability state.
Then, while the time-saving control is stopped (while the normal symbol low probability state is occurring), the probability of winning the "normal symbol win" by the normal symbol lottery is set to a first probability. On the other hand, while the time-saving control is being executed (while the normal symbol high probability state is occurring), the probability of winning the "normal symbol win" by the normal symbol lottery is set to a second probability higher than the first probability.
Moreover, while the time-saving control is being executed, the time for displaying the variable display of the normal symbols is shortened compared to when the time-saving control is stopped, and in the normal winning game state described later, the number of times the normal electric device 53a is opened is increased and the opening time of the normal electric device 53a is extended. Furthermore, while the time-saving control is being executed, the time for displaying the variable display of the special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "variation time") is shortened compared to when the time-saving control is stopped.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a special pattern low probability state and a special pattern high probability state are defined as game states related to the probability of winning the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery and second special pattern lottery) described below.
The probability of winning a "jackpot" through the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery and second special pattern lottery) changes depending on whether a special pattern low probability state is occurring or a special pattern high probability state is occurring.
That is, when the special symbol low probability state occurs, the probability of winning the "jackpot" through the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is set to a first probability (probability according to a set value). On the other hand, when the special symbol high probability state occurs, the probability of winning the "jackpot" through the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is set to a second probability (probability according to a set value) that is higher than the first probability.
On the other hand, the probability of winning a "small win" through the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery and second special pattern lottery) does not change whether the special pattern low probability state is occurring or the special pattern high probability state is occurring.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 5, four game states (specifically, "game state A" to "game state D") are defined in the pachinko machine 1.
"Game state A" is a game state in which the time-saving control is stopped (a normal low probability state is occurring) and a special low probability state is occurring.
"Game state B" is a game state in which time-saving control is being executed (a normal high probability state is occurring) and a special high probability state is occurring.
"Game state C" is a game state in which the time-saving control is stopped (a low probability state for normal symbols is occurring) and a high probability state for special symbols is occurring.
"Game state D" is a game state in which time-saving control is being executed (a normal high probability state is occurring) and a special low probability state is occurring.

(Regarding various lotteries)
Next, various lotteries executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
Fig. 6 is a diagram showing the winning probabilities of various lotteries. Fig. 7 is a diagram showing the winning types of various lotteries.
Note that Figure 6(a) shows the winning probability of the regular symbol lottery, Figure 6(b) shows the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery, and Figure 6(c) shows the winning probability of the second special symbol lottery.
In addition, Figure 7(a) shows the winning type (type of "jackpot pattern") that will be selected if a "jackpot" is won in the first special pattern lottery, and Figure 7(b) shows the winning type (type of "jackpot pattern") that will be selected if a "jackpot" is won in the second special pattern lottery.

(Regular design lottery)
In the pachinko machine 1, the passing of the game ball through the start gate 41 triggers the execution of a regular symbol lottery.
In the pachinko machine 1, the results of the regular symbol lottery are defined as "regular symbol win" and "loss."
As shown in Figure 6 (a), in the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern win/loss determination) that is performed while the time-saving control is stopped (while the normal pattern low probability state occurs), the probability of being determined to be a "normal pattern win" (winning) is 1/65536.
On the other hand, in the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern win/loss determination) that is executed while the time-saving control is being executed (while the normal pattern high probability state is occurring), the probability of being determined to be a "normal pattern win" (winning) is 1/1 (or approximately 1/1).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, only "normal winning pattern 1" is specified as the winning type (type of normal winning pattern) to be selected when a "normal winning pattern" is won in the normal pattern lottery.
When the "normal winning pattern 1" is won, the normal pattern display device is controlled to stop and display the normal pattern at "normal winning pattern 1".
On the other hand, if the player loses the regular symbol lottery (in the case of a "lose" result), the regular symbol display device is controlled to stop and display the regular symbol as a "lose symbol."
When the "normal winning symbol 1" is selected, a normal winning game state is generated. In the normal winning game state, the normal electric device 53a is shifted (opened) from a closed state to an open state, and the game ball can enter the third starting hole 53.
In the normal winning game state, the number of times the normal electric device 53a is opened is set to 1 [time] or 3 [times], and the opening time of the normal electric device 53a each time is set to 0.5 [s] or 2.0 [s].
In this case, while the time-saving control is being executed, the number of times that the normal electric device 53a is opened is set to 3 times, and the opening time of the normal electric device 53a for each opening is set to 2.0 seconds.
On the other hand, while the time-saving control is stopped, the number of times the normal electric device 53a is opened is set to 1 [time], and the opening time of the normal electric device 53a for each opening is set to 0.5 [s].

(Special design lottery)
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a first special pattern lottery is executed when a game ball enters the first starting hole 51, and a second special pattern lottery is executed when a game ball enters the second starting hole 52 or the third starting hole 53.
In the pachinko machine 1, the results of the first special symbol lottery are defined as "big win,""smallwin," and "loss." On the other hand, the results of the second special symbol lottery are defined as "big win,""smallwin," and "loss."
In addition, the first special pattern lottery may be configured so that a "small win" cannot be won.

As shown in Figures 6(b) and (c), in pachinko machine 1, the probability of winning a "big win" through the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery and second special pattern lottery) is 1/319 (varies depending on the set value) when a special pattern low probability state is occurring, and 1/136 (varies depending on the set value) when a special pattern high probability state is occurring. Also, the probability of winning a "small win" through the first special pattern lottery is 1/50. Furthermore, the probability of winning a "small win" through the second special pattern lottery is 1/10.
Here, as described above, the probability of winning a "jackpot" through the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) varies depending on the set value. Note that the probability of winning a "jackpot" through the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) may be configured not to vary depending on the set value.

As shown in Figure 7(a), in pachinko machine 1, "jackpot pattern 1" and "jackpot pattern 2" are specified as the winning types (types of jackpot patterns) to be selected when a "jackpot" is won in the first special pattern lottery.
On the other hand, as shown in Figure 7(b), "jackpot pattern 3" to "jackpot pattern 5" are specified as the winning types (types of jackpot patterns) to be selected when a "jackpot" is won in the second special pattern lottery.
In addition, only "small win pattern 1" is specified as the winning type (type of small win pattern) to be selected when a "small win" is won in the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery.

When the "jackpot symbol 1" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "jackpot symbol 1" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display device. Also, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "chance symbol" is stopped and displayed in the performance symbol display area A.
Here, the "chance pattern" is, for example, a display mode in which the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 is a "number pattern" showing the same even numbers, such as "2, 2, 2," and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 shows a predetermined color.
When the "jackpot symbol 2" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "jackpot symbol 2" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display device. Also, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "chance symbol" is stopped and displayed in the performance symbol display area A.

When the "jackpot symbol 3" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "jackpot symbol 3" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 2 display device. Also, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "rush symbol" is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area B.
Here, the "rush pattern" is, for example, a display mode in which the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 is a "number pattern" indicating a specific number such as "7, 7, 7," and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 is a predetermined color.
When the "jackpot symbol 4" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "jackpot symbol 4" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 2 display device. Also, in the performance symbol display area B, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "probability variable symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, the "probable change pattern" is, for example, a display mode in which the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 is a "number pattern" showing the same odd numbers such as "3, 3, 3", and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 shows a predetermined color.

When the "jackpot symbol 5" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "jackpot symbol 5" is displayed in a stopped state on the special symbol 2 display device. Also, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "normal symbol" is displayed in the effect symbol display area B.
Here, the "normal pattern" is, for example, a display mode in which the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 is a "number pattern" showing the same even numbers, such as "4, 4, 4," and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 shows a predetermined color.

On the other hand, when the "small win symbol 1" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "small win symbol 1" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device (special symbol 1 display device or special symbol 2 display device). Also, in the performance symbol display areas A and B, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "small win symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, the "small winning pattern" is, for example, a display mode in which the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 is a combination having a predetermined regularity, such as "1, 2, 3," and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 shows a predetermined color.
On the other hand, if the player loses the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) (in the case of a "lose"), the special symbol display device (special symbol 1 display device or special symbol 2 display device) displays a stopped symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "lose symbol." Also, in the performance symbol display areas A and B, the stopped symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "lose symbol" is displayed.
Here, a "losing pattern" is, for example, a display mode in which the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed in the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 has a combination of numbers, such as "1, 6, 9," that is different from the numbers shown by the "number pattern" stopped and displayed in at least one area and the "number pattern" stopped and displayed in the other areas, and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 has a predetermined color.

When "jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 5" are selected, a jackpot gaming state is generated. In the jackpot gaming state, the first special electric device 54a is shifted from a closed state to an open state, and the gaming ball can enter the first large winning hole 54.
Specifically, during the jackpot game state, a predetermined number of rounds of play are executed. In this embodiment, if any of "jackpot symbols 1" to "jackpot symbols 5" is won, the number of rounds of play is set to 6.
In addition, if the "jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 5" are won, the maximum opening time of the first special electric device 54a in each round of play is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment).
Each round of play ends when one of the following conditions is met: (1) the longest opening time has elapsed since the first special electric device 54a was opened, and (2) the number of game balls entering the first large prize opening 54 during the round of play reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 balls in this embodiment).

If "Jackpot Pattern 1" to "Jackpot Pattern 5" are won, the first of the predetermined number of rounds executed during the jackpot game state will be a "V round."
In the "V round game", the distribution means is shifted from a non-V passing state to a V passing state.
In this case, if "jackpot pattern 1" or "jackpot pattern 5" is won, the distribution means is shifted from a non-V passing state to a V passing state in such a way that it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball that enters the first large winning opening 54 during the V-round game to pass through the V area.
As a result, if "jackpot symbol 1" or "jackpot symbol 5" is won, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the jackpot game state. Therefore, "jackpot symbol 1" or "jackpot symbol 5" is essentially a winning type that does not cause a special symbol high probability state to occur after the jackpot game state ends.
On the other hand, if "jackpot pattern 2" to "jackpot pattern 4" are won, the distribution means is shifted from a non-V passing state to a V passing state in such a way that it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball that enters the first large prize opening 54 during the V-round game to pass through the V area.
As a result, if "jackpot symbol 2" to "jackpot symbol 4" are won, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the jackpot game state. Therefore, "jackpot symbol 2" to "jackpot symbol 4" are winning types that can cause a special symbol high probability state after the jackpot game state ends.
Here, among the predetermined number of round games executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, in round games other than the V round game, the distribution means is not shifted from the non-V passing state to the V passing state, so that it is impossible for a game ball that has entered the first big winning opening 54 during the execution of other round games other than the V round game to pass through the V area.

If the passage of the game ball through the V region is not detected during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is set to a special low probability state.
On the other hand, if the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of a jackpot game state, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is set to a special chart high probability state.
In other words, if "jackpot symbol 1" or "jackpot symbol 5" is won, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball that enters the first large prize opening 54 to pass through the V area during the V-round game. As a result, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes a special low probability state.
On the other hand, if "jackpot symbol 2" to "jackpot symbol 4" are won, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball that enters the first large prize opening 54 to pass through the V area during the V-round game. As a result, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state usually becomes a special symbol high probability state.
The special symbol high probability state is initiated in response to the end of the jackpot game state, and is terminated in response to the establishment of one of the following conditions: (1) the number of special symbol hit determinations executed during the occurrence of the special symbol high probability state (the number of times the notification display of the special symbol is executed during the occurrence of the special symbol high probability state) reaches a predetermined number of times of probability change (10,000 times in this embodiment) (the number of times the variable display of the special symbol initiated during the occurrence of the special symbol high probability state reaches the predetermined number of times of probability change), and (2) the next jackpot game state starts (the stopped display of the "jackpot symbol" has ended).
If the condition (1) is met, the special symbol high probability state ends when the special symbol variable display for the predetermined number of times begins. On the other hand, if the condition (2) is met, the special symbol high probability state ends when the "jackpot symbol" stops displaying (when the stop time has elapsed).

Furthermore, when the big win gaming state ends, a predetermined number of time-shortening operations is set, and after the big win gaming state ends, time-shortening control is executed according to the set number of time-shortening operations.
As shown in Figure 7(a), when "jackpot symbol 1" or "jackpot symbol 2" is hit, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000 [times] or 100 [times]. In this case, if the passage of the gaming ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000 [times], and if the passage of the gaming ball through the V area is not detected during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, the number of time-saving times is set to 100 [times].
On the other hand, as shown in Figure 7(b), when "jackpot pattern 3" is hit, the number of time-saving times is set to 0 [times] or 100 [times]. In this case, if the passage of the gaming ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, the number of time-saving times is set to 0 [times], and if the passage of the gaming ball through the V area is not detected during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, the number of time-saving times is set to 100 [times].
On the other hand, if "jackpot symbol 4" or "jackpot symbol 5" is hit, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000 [times] or 100 [times]. In this case, if the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of a jackpot game state, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000 [times], and if the passage of the game ball through the V area is not detected during the occurrence of a jackpot game state, the number of time-saving times is set to 100 [times].

If the number of time-saving times is set to 0, the time-saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot game state. On the other hand, if the number of time-saving times is set to 1 or more, the time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state.
The time-saving control is initiated in response to the end of the jackpot game state, and is terminated in response to the establishment of one of the following conditions: (1) the number of special symbol hit determinations executed during the time-saving control (the number of times the notification display of the special symbol is executed during the time-saving control) reaches the set number of time-saving times (the number of times the variable display of the special symbol initiated during the time-saving control reaches the set number of time-saving times), and (2) the next jackpot game state begins (the stopped display of the "jackpot symbol" has ended).
If the condition (1) is met, the time-saving control is terminated when the variable display of the special symbol for the set time-saving number of times begins. On the other hand, if the condition (2) is met, the time-saving control is terminated when the stopped display of the "jackpot symbol" ends (when the stop time has elapsed).

When the "small win symbol 1" is won, a small win game state is generated. In the small win game state, the second special electric device 55a is shifted from a closed state to an open state, and the game ball can enter the second large winning hole 55.
Specifically, during the occurrence of the small win game state, a predetermined number of small win games are executed. In this embodiment, when the "small win symbol 1" is won, the number of small win games is set to 1 [time].
In addition, if the "small win pattern 1" is won, the maximum opening time of the second special electric device 55a in each small win game is set to a predetermined time (1.8 [s] in this embodiment).
Furthermore, if the "small win symbol 1" is won, the second large winning opening 55 is opened in each small win game. That is, in each small win game, the second special electric device 55a is shifted from a closed state to an open state, and the game ball can enter the second large winning opening 55.
Each small win game is ended when one of the following conditions is met: the longest opening time has elapsed since the second special electric device 55a was opened, or the number of game balls entering the second large winning port 55 during the small win game has reached a predetermined upper limit (8 balls in this embodiment).
In this embodiment, the game state (execution status of time-saving control) does not change before and after the small win game state.

(Regarding the time it takes for special symbols to change)
Next, the variation time of the special symbols selected and set during the occurrence of each game state ("game state A" to "game state D") will be explained.
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the variation time of the special symbols selected and set during each game state.
Note that Figure 8(a) shows the change time of the special symbol selected and set when "game state A" occurs, Figure 8(b) shows the change time of the special symbol selected and set when "game state B" occurs, Figure 8(c) shows the change time of the special symbol selected and set when "game state C" occurs, and Figure 8(d) shows the change time of the special symbol selected and set when "game state D" occurs.

The fluctuation time (fluctuation mode/fluctuation pattern) of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) at the time of "jackpot" is selected by the winning fluctuation pattern determination process described later. Then, in the winning fluctuation pattern determination process, the fluctuation time (fluctuation mode/fluctuation pattern) of the special symbol is selected based on the reserved type (special symbol 1 game information or special symbol 2 game information), the game state ("game state A" to "game state D"), and the type of stopped symbol.
On the other hand, the fluctuation time (fluctuation mode/fluctuation pattern) of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) when "missing" is selected by a fluctuation pattern determination process when losing, which will be described later. In the fluctuation pattern determination process when losing, the fluctuation time (fluctuation mode/fluctuation pattern) of the special symbol is selected based on the reserved type (special symbol 1 game information or special symbol 2 game information), the reserved number (special symbol 1 reserved number or special symbol 2 reserved number), and the game state ("game state A" to "game state D").
On the other hand, the fluctuation time (fluctuation mode/fluctuation pattern) of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) at the time of "small win" is selected by either the winning fluctuation pattern determination process or the losing fluctuation pattern determination process. At this time, either the winning fluctuation pattern determination process or the losing fluctuation pattern determination process is selected based on the game state ("game state A" to "game state D") and the reserved type (special symbol 1 game information or special symbol 2 game information).
This eliminates the need to set up dedicated processing to determine the fluctuation time (fluctuation mode/fluctuation pattern) of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) when a ``small hit'' occurs, making it possible to simplify the processing.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 8 (a), when the result of the special symbol hit determination based on the special symbol 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state A" is "small hit," the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is selected by the loss fluctuation pattern determination process. This makes it possible to make the form (content) of the fluctuation presentation the same whether the result of the special symbol hit determination based on the special symbol 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state A" is "small hit" or "miss."
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state A" is a "small hit," the winning time change pattern determination process selects the change time of the second special symbol. This makes it possible to make the mode (content) of the change presentation the same whether the result of the special symbol hit determination based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state A" is a "small hit" or a "big hit."
On the other hand, as shown in Figure 8 (b), if the result of the special symbol hit determination based on the special symbol 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state B" is a "small hit," the winning time change pattern determination process selects the change time of the first special symbol. This makes it possible to make the mode (content) of the change presentation the same whether the result of the special symbol hit determination based on the special symbol 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state B" is a "small hit" or a "big hit."
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state B" is "small hit", the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is selected by the loss time fluctuation pattern determination process. This makes it possible to make the form (content) of the fluctuation presentation the same whether the result of the special symbol hit determination based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state B" is "small hit" or "miss".

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 8 (c), if the result of the special symbol hit determination based on the special symbol 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state C" is a "small hit," the winning time change pattern determination process selects the change time of the first special symbol. This makes it possible to make the mode (content) of the change presentation the same whether the result of the special symbol hit determination based on the special symbol 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state C" is a "small hit" or a "big hit."
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state C" is a "small hit," the winning time change pattern determination process selects the change time of the second special symbol. This makes it possible to make the mode (content) of the change presentation the same whether the result of the special symbol hit determination based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state C" is a "small hit" or a "big hit."
On the other hand, as shown in Figure 8 (d), if the result of the special symbol hit determination based on the special symbol 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state D" is a "small hit," the winning time change pattern determination process selects the change time of the first special symbol. This makes it possible to make the mode (content) of the change presentation the same whether the result of the special symbol hit determination based on the special symbol 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state D" is a "small hit" or a "big hit."
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state D" is "small hit", the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is selected by the loss time fluctuation pattern determination process. This makes it possible to make the mode (content) of the fluctuation presentation the same whether the result of the special symbol hit determination based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state D" is "small hit" or "miss".

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the groups of the variation modes (combinations of variation modes and variation patterns) of the special symbols are defined as "normal variation,""longvariation,""shortvariation," and "exclusive variation."
"Normal fluctuation" is a group to which fluctuation modes associated with normal fluctuation times belong. In this embodiment, the fluctuation times (normal fluctuation times) corresponding to each fluctuation mode belonging to "normal fluctuation" are specified as 4.0 [s] to 180.0 [s].
The "long fluctuation" is a group to which fluctuation modes that are associated with a longer fluctuation time (hereinafter referred to as "long fluctuation time") than fluctuation modes that belong to other groups belong. In this embodiment, 590.0 [s] is specified as the fluctuation time (long fluctuation time) corresponding to each fluctuation mode that belongs to the "long fluctuation" group.
"Short fluctuation" is a group to which fluctuation modes that are associated with a fluctuation time that is shorter than the normal fluctuation time (hereinafter referred to as "short fluctuation time") belong. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time (short fluctuation time) corresponding to each fluctuation mode belonging to "short fluctuation" is specified to be 3.0 [s] to 10.0 [s].
The "exclusive variation" is a variation mode exclusive to when a "small win" or a "loss" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the "game state C." In this embodiment, the variation time corresponding to each variation mode belonging to the "exclusive variation" is specified as 1.0 [s] to 10.0 [s].
As shown in FIG. 8(a), if the result of the special symbol hit determination based on the special symbol 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state A" is a "jackpot," a "small hit," or a "miss," then "normal fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time is within the range of 4.0 [s] to 180.0 [s]. In this case, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is a "jackpot," then the fluctuation mode corresponding to the "jackpot" (fluctuating time = within the range of 120.0 [s] to 180.0 [s]) is selected as the fluctuation mode from among the fluctuation modes belonging to "normal fluctuation." On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is a "small hit" or a "miss," then the fluctuation mode corresponding to the "miss" (fluctuating time = within the range of 4.0 [s] to 180.0 [s]) is selected as the fluctuation mode from among the fluctuation modes belonging to "normal fluctuation."
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state A" is "big hit", "small hit", or "miss", "long fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time becomes 590.0 [s].
On the other hand, as shown in Figure 8 (b), if the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state B" is "big hit", "small hit", or "miss", "long fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time becomes 590.0 [s].
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state B" is "jackpot", "normal fluctuation" (a fluctuation mode corresponding to "jackpot" among the fluctuation modes belonging to "normal fluctuation") is selected as the fluctuation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time is within the range of 120.0 [s] to 180.0 [s].
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state B" is "small hit" or "miss", "short fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time is within the range of 3.0 [s] to 10.0 [s].
On the other hand, as shown in Figure 8 (c), if the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state C" is "big hit", "small hit", or "miss", "long fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time becomes 590.0 [s].
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state C" is "jackpot", "normal fluctuation" (a fluctuation mode corresponding to "jackpot" among the fluctuation modes belonging to "normal fluctuation") is selected as the fluctuation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time is within the range of 120.0 [s] to 180.0 [s].
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state C" is "small hit" or "miss", "exclusive fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time is within the range of 1.0 [s] to 10.0 [s].
On the other hand, as shown in Figure 8 (d), if the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state D" is "big hit", "small hit", or "miss", "long fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time becomes 590.0 [s].
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state D" is "jackpot", "normal fluctuation" (a fluctuation mode corresponding to "jackpot" among the fluctuation modes belonging to "normal fluctuation") is selected as the fluctuation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time is within the range of 120.0 [s] to 180.0 [s].
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state D" is "small hit" or "miss", "short fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time is within the range of 3.0 [s] to 10.0 [s].

(Regarding game state transitions)
Next, the transition of the game state will be explained.
As shown in Figure 7(a), if "jackpot pattern 1" or "jackpot pattern 2" is won based on the first special pattern lottery and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the jackpot game state, the game state after the jackpot game state ends will be "game state B."
On the other hand, if "jackpot pattern 1" or "jackpot pattern 2" is won based on the first special pattern lottery and the passage of the game ball through the V area is not detected during the jackpot game state, the game state after the jackpot game state ends will be "game state D."
Here, as described above, if "jackpot symbol 1" is selected, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the gaming ball to pass through the V area during the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, if "jackpot symbol 1" is selected based on the first special symbol lottery, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends will usually be "gaming state D."
On the other hand, as described above, if the "jackpot symbol 2" is selected, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, if the "jackpot symbol 2" is selected based on the first special symbol lottery, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends will usually be "gaming state B."

As shown in Figure 7 (b), if the "jackpot pattern 3" is selected based on the second special pattern lottery and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the jackpot game state, the game state after the jackpot game state ends will be "game state C."
On the other hand, if the "jackpot pattern 3" is selected based on the second special pattern lottery and the passage of the game ball through the V area is not detected during the jackpot game state, the game state after the jackpot game state ends will be "game state D."
Here, as described above, if "jackpot symbol 3" is selected, it becomes easy (possible) for the gaming ball to pass through the V area during the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, if "jackpot symbol 3" is selected based on the second special symbol lottery, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends will usually be "gaming state C."
If "jackpot pattern 4" or "jackpot pattern 5" is selected based on the second special pattern lottery and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the jackpot game state, the game state after the jackpot game state ends will be "game state B."
On the other hand, if "jackpot pattern 4" or "jackpot pattern 5" is won based on the second special pattern lottery and the passage of the game ball through the V area is not detected during the jackpot game state, the game state after the jackpot game state ends will be "game state D."
Here, as described above, if "jackpot symbol 4" is selected, it becomes easy (possible) for the gaming ball to pass through the V area during the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, if "jackpot symbol 4" is selected based on the second special symbol lottery, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends will usually be "gaming state B."
On the other hand, as described above, if the "jackpot symbol 5" is selected, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, if the "jackpot symbol 5" is selected based on the second special symbol lottery, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends will usually be "gaming state D."

(Regarding simultaneous fluctuation of special symbols)
In pachinko machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously (at the same time) execute the notification display (variable display and stop display) of the first special pattern on the special pattern 1 display device and the notification display (variable display and stop display) of the second special pattern on the special pattern 2 display device in parallel.
In other words, in pachinko machine 1, when neither a jackpot game state nor a small jackpot game state is occurring, and when the "jackpot pattern" is not being displayed stopped (during the stopped time) for one of the game information (special patterns) of special pattern 1 game information (first special pattern) and special pattern 2 game information (second special pattern), it is possible to perform start judgment (special pattern hit judgment, special pattern pattern judgment, special pattern change pattern judgment, etc.) for the other game information.

In particular, when a start determination is made based on one of the game information, the special chart 1 game information and the special chart 2 game information, if the other game information is displaying a changing "jackpot pattern" (during the changing time), the result of the start determination based on that one game information cannot be determined as a "jackpot" (jackpot pattern) or a "small hit" (small hit pattern), and is forcibly determined as a "miss" (miss pattern).
For example, when a start determination based on the first game information is executed, if a variable display based on the second game information in which a "jackpot pattern" has been determined by the start determination is in progress (during the variable time), the result of the start determination based on the first game information is forcibly determined to be a "miss" (missing pattern).
On the other hand, when a start determination is made based on one of the game information, the special chart 1 game information and the special chart 2 game information, if the other game information is displaying a variable "small win pattern" or "miss pattern" (during the variable time), the result of the start determination based on that one game information will not be forced.
Here, in this embodiment, when a start judgment is made based on one of the game information, special chart 1 game information and special chart 2 game information, if the ``jackpot pattern'' is being displayed in a changing state (during the changing time) for the other game information, the special chart hit judgment (special chart big hit judgment and special chart small hit judgment) is not made in the start judgment based on that one game information.
However, when a start judgment is made based on one of the game information, special chart 1 game information and special chart 2 game information, if the other game information is in the process of displaying a changing ``jackpot pattern'' (during the changing time), the start judgment based on that one game information may be configured so that after the special chart hit judgment (special chart big hit judgment and special chart small hit judgment) is made, the result of the special chart hit judgment is rewritten to ``miss.''

Furthermore, when the stop display (stop time) of the "big win pattern" or "small win pattern" for one of the game information, special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information, starts, if the other game information is in the middle of a changing display (during the changing time), the other game information is forcibly changed to a "losing pattern," the changing display (changing time) ends, and the stop display (stop time) starts.
For example, if a variable display based on the second game information is in progress at the start of a stop display based on the first game information in which a "jackpot symbol" has been determined by a start determination, the variable display based on the second game information is forcibly ended and a stop display based on the second game information is started. At this time, a "losing symbol" is forcibly stopped and displayed, regardless of the result of the start determination based on the second game information.
On the other hand, if, for one of the special chart 1 game information and the special chart 2 game information, the stopped display (stop time) of the ``losing pattern'' begins, and the other game information is in the process of changing display (during changing time), the changing display (changing time) will continue for the other game information.

Here, for one of the special chart 1 game information and the special chart 2 game information, when the stopped display (stop time) of the ``big win pattern'' or ``small win pattern'' begins, if the other game information is in the middle of a changing display (during a changing time), the measurement of the changing time for the other game information may be interrupted.
In such a configuration, when the big win game state or small win game state for one piece of game information ends, the measurement of the suspended variable time for the other piece of game information is resumed. At this time, while the big win game state or small win game state for one piece of game information is occurring, the measurement of the variable time for the other piece of game information is suspended, but the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) on the special pattern display device (special pattern 1 display device or special pattern 2 display device) and the variable display of the effect pattern in the effect pattern display area (effect pattern display area A or effect pattern display area B) continue.
Alternatively, for one of the special chart 1 game information and the special chart 2 game information, when the stopped display (stop time) of the "big win pattern" starts, and the other game information is in the middle of a changing display (during the changing time), the other game information is forcibly changed to a "missing pattern", the changing display (changing time) ends, and the stopped display (stop time) starts; and for one of the special chart 1 game information and the special chart 2 game information, when the stopped display (stop time) of the "small win pattern" starts, and the other game information is in the middle of a changing display (during the changing time), the measurement of the changing time for the other game information is interrupted.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 is capable of simultaneously changing special symbols, the game state is changed when the display of the changing special symbols starts.
That is, during the execution of the time-saving control, the value of the time-saving counter is updated at the start of each variable display of the special symbol, and based on the updated value of the time-saving counter, it is determined whether or not to terminate the time-saving control. Then, if it is determined that the time-saving control should be terminated, the time-saving control is terminated.
In addition, during the occurrence of the special symbol high probability state, the value of the probability variable counter is updated at the start of each special symbol variable display, and based on the updated value of the probability variable counter, it is determined whether or not to end the special symbol high probability state. Then, if it is determined that the special symbol high probability state should be ended, the special symbol high probability state is ended.

(Regarding game progress)
Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state.
As shown in Figure 9, pachinko machine 1 has four game states (game zones), and while a game is in progress, one of the four game states ("game state A,""game state B,""game state C," and "game state D") occurs.
The degree of advantage of the four gaming states is, in order from most advantageous to least advantageous, "gaming state C,""gaming state B,""gaming state D," and "gaming state A" (high advantage → low advantage). Here, "advantage" refers to the degree of advantage to the player.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1, when a "jackpot" is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), a jackpot game state is created in which a gaming ball can enter the first large winning slot 54. Then, the player can win prize balls by getting the gaming ball to enter the first large winning slot 54.
Furthermore, if a "small win" is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), a small win game state is created in which a game ball can enter the second large prize opening 55. Then, the player can win prize balls by entering the game ball into the second large prize opening 55.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, the number of prize balls paid out each time a game ball is detected entering the first large prize opening 54 is greater than the number of prize balls paid out each time a game ball is detected entering the second large prize opening 55. Also, the number of round games executed during the jackpot game state is the same as or greater than the number of small prize games executed during the small prize game state. This makes it possible to win more prize balls in the jackpot game state than in the small prize game state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a special pattern high probability state and a special pattern low probability state are defined as game states regarding the probability of winning the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery or second special pattern lottery) (specifically, the probability of winning the "jackpot").
Furthermore, when a special pattern high probability state occurs, the probability of winning a "jackpot" through the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery or second special pattern lottery) is higher than when a special pattern low probability state occurs.
This makes it more likely that a jackpot game state will occur when a special pattern high probability state is occurring than when a special pattern low probability state is occurring, which is advantageous for the player.
In addition, the probability of winning a "small win" through the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery or second special pattern lottery) does not change whether a special pattern high probability state is occurring or a special pattern low probability state is occurring.

In addition, in pachinko machine 1, the game states regarding the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery (specifically, the probability of winning a ``normal pattern hit'') are specified as a normal pattern high probability state (a state in which time-saving control is being executed) and a normal pattern low probability state (a state in which time-saving control is stopped).
Furthermore, when a normal symbol high probability state is occurring (time-saving control is being executed), the probability of winning a "normal symbol win" through the normal symbol lottery is higher than when a normal symbol low probability state is occurring (time-saving control is stopped). Also, when a normal symbol high probability state is occurring, the time for displaying the normal symbol variations is shortened compared to when a normal symbol low probability state is occurring. Also, when a normal symbol high probability state is occurring, the number of times the normal electric device 53a is opened in the normal symbol win game state is increased compared to when a normal symbol low probability state is occurring. Furthermore, when a normal symbol high probability state is occurring, the opening time of the normal electric device 53a in the normal symbol win game state is extended compared to when a normal symbol low probability state is occurring.
This makes it easier for a game ball to enter the third starting hole 53 when a normal symbol high probability state is occurring than when a normal symbol low probability state is occurring, so it is possible to obtain more opportunities to draw special symbols while suppressing the reduction in the number of balls held, which is advantageous for the player.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the types of special symbol lottery (special symbol) are defined as a first special symbol lottery (first special symbol) and a second special symbol lottery (second special symbol).
The second special symbol lottery has a higher probability of winning a "small win" compared to the first special symbol lottery. Also, the second special symbol lottery has a higher probability of transitioning to a high probability win compared to the first special symbol lottery.
As a result, the second special symbol lottery has a higher possibility of causing a small win game state than the first special symbol lottery, and also has a higher possibility of causing a special symbol high probability state when a "big win" is won, which is advantageous for the player.
The "high probability transition probability" is the probability that a "high probability jackpot pattern" will be selected when a "jackpot" is won through the special pattern lottery.
The "high probability jackpot symbol" is a type (winning type) of "jackpot symbol" that makes it easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the jackpot gaming state. In other words, the "high probability jackpot symbol" is essentially a type (winning type) of "jackpot symbol" that causes a special high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends.
The "low probability jackpot symbol" is a type (winning type) of "jackpot symbol" in which it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the jackpot gaming state. In other words, the "low probability jackpot symbol" is essentially a type (winning type) of "jackpot symbol" in which a special low probability state occurs after the jackpot gaming state ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7(a), "jackpot symbol 1" and "jackpot symbol 2" are defined as winning types to be selected when a "jackpot" is won by the first special symbol lottery. Of the "jackpot symbol 1" and "jackpot symbol 2,""jackpot symbol 1" is a "low probability jackpot symbol," and "jackpot symbol 2" is a "high probability jackpot symbol." The probability of "jackpot symbol 2" being selected is 50%. Therefore, the probability of transitioning to high probability in the first special symbol lottery is 50%.
On the other hand, as shown in Figure 7 (b), "jackpot symbol 3" to "jackpot symbol 5" are specified as winning types to be selected when a "jackpot" is won by the second special symbol lottery. Among "jackpot symbol 3" to "jackpot symbol 5,""jackpot symbol 3" and "jackpot symbol 4" are "high probability jackpot symbols," and "jackpot symbol 5" is "low probability jackpot symbol." Therefore, the probability of transitioning to high probability in the second special symbol lottery is approximately 66%.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, the probability of winning a "small win" in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is higher than the probability of winning a "big win." In particular, the probability of winning a "small win" in the second special symbol lottery is higher than in the first special symbol lottery.
This allows the pachinko machine 1 to have more opportunities to draw the second special pattern, making it possible to continuously generate small win game states in a short period of time, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the ball payout rate (payout rate) based on the small win game state.
The "ball payout rate" is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts (number of prize balls paid out) to the number of balls out (number of game balls shot out).

"Game state A" is the normal game zone.
In the pachinko machine 1, when the RAM clear initialization process (step S1-30) described later is executed, the "game state A" is generated.
Here, the first starting hole 51 is an entrance (fixed entrance) that opens upward, and game balls can always be inserted into it. As a result, when "game state A" is occurring, by inserting a game ball into the first starting hole 51, it becomes possible to obtain an opportunity to win the first special symbol lottery.
On the other hand, while "game state A" is occurring, the probability of winning a "normal symbol win" through the normal symbol lottery is low (1/65536 in this embodiment). As a result, even if a game ball that enters the right path passes through the start gate 41, the possibility of a normal symbol win game state occurring is low, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the third start gate 53. Therefore, it becomes difficult to gain an opportunity to enter the second special symbol lottery based on the game ball entering the third start gate 53.
On the other hand, the second starting hole 52 is an entrance (fixed entrance) that opens upward, and game balls can always be inserted into it. As a result, when "game state A" is occurring, by inserting a game ball into the second starting hole 52, it becomes possible to obtain an opportunity to win the second special symbol lottery.
However, when the second special symbol lottery is executed while "game state A" is occurring, the "long fluctuation time" (specifically, 590.0 [s]) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol regardless of the lottery result.
As a result, even if an opportunity for the second special symbol drawing is acquired during the occurrence of "game state A," the time for which the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner becomes longer, making it difficult to acquire many opportunities for the second special symbol drawing in a short period of time. As a result, it becomes difficult to continuously generate a small win game state in a short period of time, and it becomes difficult to improve the payout rate based on the small win game state.
Therefore, when "game state A" is occurring, the game ball is shot down the left path with the aim of getting the game ball into the first starting hole 51 in order to get a chance to draw the first special symbol.
Here, during "game state A," if a "small win" is won by the first special symbol lottery, the small win game state is triggered. However, even if the path for launching the game ball is changed from the left path to the right path when the "small win symbol" is stopped and displayed, the game ball that entered the right path will not reach the second large prize opening 55 by the time the small win game state ends. This makes it difficult to win prize balls based on the small win game state, even if a "small win" is won by the first special symbol lottery.
Furthermore, while the "gaming state A" is occurring, the probability of winning the "jackpot" through the first special symbol lottery is low (1/319 in this embodiment). This reduces the possibility of the jackpot gaming state occurring.
As a result, during "game state A," the probability of a big win game state occurring is low, and it is difficult to win prize balls based on a small win game state. As a result, in order to transition to a more advantageous game state, the player will progress through the game with the aim of gaining more opportunities to win the first special symbol lottery. In other words, the player will launch the game ball along the left path with the aim of getting the game ball into the first starting hole 51.

As shown in Figure 9, if "jackpot pattern 1" is won based on the first special pattern lottery executed while "game state A" is occurring, "game state D" is usually generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot pattern 2" is won based on the first special pattern lottery executed while the "game state A" is occurring, the "game state B" is usually generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
In this way, when "game state A" is occurring, a "jackpot" is hit, which triggers a transition of the game state. In this case, if "jackpot symbol 1" is hit, the game state transitions to "game state D," and if "jackpot symbol 2" is hit, the game state transitions to "game state B." In particular, transitioning to "game state B" is more advantageous for the player than transitioning to "game state D."

"Game state D" is a game zone for pulling back the "high probability jackpot pattern."
That is, while "game state D" is occurring, the probability of winning a "normal symbol win" through the normal symbol lottery is high (1/1 in this embodiment). As a result, every time a game ball that has entered the right path passes through the start gate 41, a normal symbol win game state is generated and the third start gate 53 is opened. Therefore, it becomes easier for game balls to enter the third start gate 53, and it becomes possible to acquire more opportunities to win the second special symbol lottery while suppressing the reduction of balls in possession.
Therefore, when "game state D" occurs, the game ball is shot out along the right path with the aim of getting the game ball into the third starting hole 53 while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held, in order to gain an opportunity to draw the second special pattern.
In this embodiment, almost all game balls that enter the right path pass through the start gate 41. As a result, during the occurrence of "game state D", almost all game balls that enter the right path pass through the start gate 41, enter the third start gate 53 that is opened as a result of the passage, and do not reach the second large prize opening 55 located downstream of the third start gate 53.
Therefore, while "game state D" is occurring, even if a "small win" is won by the second special symbol lottery, it becomes difficult to acquire prize balls based on the small win game state.
Furthermore, while the "gaming state D" is occurring, the probability of winning the "jackpot" through the second special symbol lottery is low (1/319 in this embodiment). This reduces the possibility of the jackpot gaming state occurring.
As a result, while "game state D" occurs, the player can obtain more opportunities to draw the second special symbol while suppressing the decrease in balls held, but the probability of a jackpot game state occurring is low, and it becomes difficult to acquire prize balls based on the small jackpot game state. As a result, in order to transition to a more advantageous game state, the player will proceed with the game aiming to win a "jackpot" through the second special symbol lottery (aiming to bring back the "high probability jackpot symbol"). In other words, the game ball will be launched along the right path with the aim of entering the third starting hole 53.

As shown in Figure 9, if "jackpot pattern 3" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed while "game state D" is occurring, "game state C" is usually generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot symbol 4" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed while the "game state D" is occurring, the "game state B" is usually generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot symbol 5" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed while the "game state D" is occurring, the "game state D" is usually generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the number of time-saving times is consumed without winning a "jackpot" based on the second special symbol lottery executed while "game state D" is occurring, "game state A" is generated in accordance with the consumption of the number of time-saving times. In other words, if the value of the time-saving counter is updated to "0" based on the start determination executed while "game state D" is occurring, "game state A" is generated in accordance with the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on the start determination.
In this way, when "game state D" is occurring, the game state changes when a "jackpot"("jackpot symbol 3" to "jackpot symbol 5") is hit or the number of time-saving options is exhausted. In this case, if "jackpot symbol 3" is hit, the game state changes to "game state C." On the other hand, if "jackpot symbol 4" is hit, the game state changes to "game state B." On the other hand, if "jackpot symbol 5" is hit, the game state changes to "game state D." On the other hand, if the number of time-saving options is exhausted, the game state changes to "game state A."

"Game state B" is a game zone for adding prize balls (outgoing balls) based on the jackpot game state.
That is, while "game state B" is occurring, the probability of winning a "normal symbol win" through the normal symbol lottery is high (1/1 in this embodiment). As a result, every time a game ball that has entered the right path passes through the start gate 41, a normal symbol win game state is created and the third start gate 53 is opened. Therefore, it becomes easier for game balls to enter the third start gate 53, and it becomes possible to acquire more opportunities to win the second special symbol lottery while suppressing the reduction of balls in possession.
Therefore, when "game state B" occurs, the game ball is shot out along the right path with the aim of getting the game ball into the third starting hole 53 while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held, in order to gain an opportunity to draw the second special pattern.
As described above, in this embodiment, almost all game balls that enter the right path pass through the start gate 41. As a result, during the occurrence of "game state B", after passing through the start gate 41, almost all game balls that enter the right path enter the third start gate 53 that is opened as a result of the passage, and do not reach the second large prize opening 55 located downstream of the third start gate 53.
Therefore, while "game state B" is occurring, even if a "small win" is won by the second special symbol lottery, it becomes difficult to acquire prize balls based on the small win game state.
On the other hand, during the "gaming state B", the probability of winning the "jackpot" through the second special symbol lottery becomes high (1/136 in this embodiment), which increases the possibility of the jackpot gaming state occurring.
As a result, during "game state B," the player can acquire more opportunities to draw the second special symbol while suppressing the decrease in balls held, and the possibility of entering a jackpot game state increases. As a result, the player progresses through the game with the aim of acquiring opportunities to draw the second special symbol in order to acquire prize balls based on the jackpot game state. In other words, the player launches the game ball along the right path with the aim of getting the game ball into the third starting hole 53.

As shown in Figure 9, if "jackpot pattern 3" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed while "game state B" is occurring, "game state C" is usually generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot pattern 4" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed while "game state B" is occurring, "game state B" is usually generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot symbol 5" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed while "game state B" is occurring, "game state D" is usually generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
In this way, when "game state B" is occurring, a "jackpot"("jackpot symbol 3" to "jackpot symbol 5") is hit, which triggers a transition of the game state. In this case, if "jackpot symbol 3" is hit, the game state transitions to "game state C." On the other hand, if "jackpot symbol 4" is hit, the game state transitions to "game state B." On the other hand, if "jackpot symbol 5" is hit, the game state transitions to "game state D."

"Game state C" is a game zone for adding prize balls (outgoing balls) based on the small win game state.
That is, while "game state C" is occurring, the probability of winning a "normal symbol win" through the normal symbol lottery is low (1/65536 in this embodiment). As a result, even if a game ball that has entered the right path passes through the start gate 41, the possibility of a normal symbol win game state occurring is low, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the third start gate 53.
As a result, when "game state C" occurs, the game ball that enters the right path passes through the start gate 41, then passes through the third start port 53, and reaches the second start port 52 and the second large prize port 55 located downstream of the third start port 53.
Therefore, while "gaming state C" is occurring, it becomes easier for a gaming ball to enter the second starting hole 52, and it becomes possible to acquire an opportunity to win the second special symbol lottery based on the gaming ball entering the second starting hole 52. Also, it becomes easier for a gaming ball to enter the second large winning hole 55 while a small win gaming state is occurring.
Furthermore, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during "game state C," the "long fluctuation time" (specifically, 590.0 [s]) is not selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the second special symbol lottery has a higher probability of winning a "small win" compared to the first special symbol lottery. This makes it easier to generate small win game states consecutively in a short period of time during "game state C," and as a result, it becomes easier to improve the payout rate based on the small win game states.
Furthermore, while the "gaming state C" is occurring, the probability of winning the "jackpot" through the second special symbol lottery becomes high (1/136 in this embodiment), which increases the possibility of the jackpot gaming state occurring.
As a result, during the occurrence of "game state C," it becomes easy to generate small win game states consecutively in a short period of time, and as a result, it becomes easy to improve the payout rate based on the small win game states. This allows the game to proceed with the aim of generating more small win game states and acquiring more opportunities to draw the second special symbol.
Here, if a "big win" is won while "game state C" is occurring, the "game state C" ends. Therefore, while "game state C" is occurring, the player progresses the game with the aim of winning as many "small wins" as possible before winning a "big win" and thereby acquiring prize balls based on as many small win game states as possible.
That is, the game ball is shot toward the right path with the aim of getting the game ball into the second starting hole 52.

As shown in Figure 9, if "jackpot pattern 3" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed while "game state C" is occurring, "game state C" is usually generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot pattern 4" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed while "game state C" is occurring, "game state B" is usually generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot symbol 5" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed while "game state C" is occurring, "game state D" is usually generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
In this way, when "game state C" is occurring, a "jackpot" (jackpot symbol 3 to jackpot symbol 5) is hit, which triggers a transition of the game state. In this case, if "jackpot symbol 3" is hit, the game state transitions to "game state C." On the other hand, if "jackpot symbol 4" is hit, the game state transitions to "game state B." On the other hand, if "jackpot symbol 5" is hit, the game state transitions to "game state D."

As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, the more times "game state C" loops, the more prize balls are acquired based on the small win game state, which is advantageous to the player. Therefore, during the occurrence of each of the four game states ("game state A,""game state B," or "game state D") other than "game state C," the game progresses with the aim of elevating to "game state C."
In particular, in pachinko machine 1, a series of sections in which players can add prize balls (hereinafter referred to as the "prize ball addition section") can be made up of two play sections with different methods of adding prize balls, thereby making it possible to improve playability.
Specifically, the "prize ball addition section" can be composed of a "big win addition section" in which prize balls are added based on the big win game state, and a "small win addition section" in which prize balls are added based on the small win game state.

(Regarding control commands)
Next, we will explain the control commands sent from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300, and the control commands sent and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400.
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are connected to each other via a serial communication harness. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 is performed in only one direction, from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300, and communication from the performance control board 300 to the main control board 200 is not performed.
Each control command sent from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300 consists of one byte of upper data indicating the type of control command and one byte of lower data indicating the content of the control command.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command consisting of upper and lower data via serial communication to the performance control board 300. When the performance control board 300 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and this interrupt processing causes the control command data to be stored in a specified area of RAM.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands sent from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300 include a pattern type designation command, a variation mode designation command, a variation pattern designation command, a stop designation command, a game status designation command, a number of reserved positions designation command, an opening designation command, a round start designation command, a round end designation command, an ending designation command, a V prize designation command, a first pre-reading designation command, a second pre-reading designation command, a third pre-reading designation command, an error designation command, a demo designation command, a setting value designation command, a first big prize designation command, a second big prize designation command, an out designation command, etc.
The symbol type designation command is a command that designates the type of the stopped symbol (one of the types of "miss symbol,""small win symbol 1," and "jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 5"). The symbol type designation command is sent when the variable display of the special symbol starts. Here, the symbol type designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information).
The fluctuation mode designation command is a command that designates the type of fluctuation mode (fluctuation mode number). The fluctuation mode designation command designates the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation mode number by designating the fluctuation mode number. The fluctuation mode designation command designates the fluctuation time of the first half period (the aspect of the first half period of the fluctuation performance) of the special pattern fluctuation display (fluctuation performance).
In this embodiment, m (plural) types of fluctuation modes are set, each associated with a different fluctuation time. The fluctuation mode designation command designates one ("fluctuation mode m") of the m types of fluctuation modes (fluctuation mode numbers).
The fluctuation pattern designation command is a command that designates the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number). The fluctuation pattern designation command designates the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation pattern number by designating the fluctuation pattern number. The fluctuation pattern designation command designates the fluctuation time of the latter half period (the aspect of the latter half period of the fluctuation performance) of the special pattern fluctuation display (fluctuation performance).
In this embodiment, n (plural) types of fluctuation patterns are set, each associated with a different fluctuation time. The fluctuation pattern designation command designates one ("fluctuation pattern n") of the n types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern numbers).
The variation mode designation command and the variation pattern designation command are sent when the variation display of the special symbol starts.

The stop designation command is a command that designates the stop display of special symbols (effect symbols z1, z2). The stop designation command is transmitted at the start of the stop display of the special symbols. Here, the stop designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information).
The game state designation command is a command that designates the game state (game state offset value).
Here, the "game state offset value" is information that specifies the game state. In this embodiment, the game state offset value is set to a value corresponding to each combination of the value of the time-saving control flag, the value of the special symbol high probability state flag, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag, and the value of the post-jackpot spin counter.
The gaming state designation command designates one gaming state offset value. The gaming state designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when a special gaming phase (described later) is changed, etc.
The reservation number designation command is a command to designate the reservation number. In this embodiment, the reservation number designation command designates that the reservation number (special drawing 1 reservation number or special drawing 2 reservation number) has increased by "1", that the reservation number has decreased by "1", or the reservation number, etc.
Here, "number of reserved special symbols 1" refers to the number of reserved notification displays (variable and stationary) of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 display device. Also, "number of reserved special symbols 2" refers to the number of reserved notification displays (variable and stationary) of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 display device.
The reserved number designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when game information is stored, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, etc. Here, reserved number designation commands corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information) are defined.

The opening designation command is a command that designates the start of the opening period (the start of a small win gaming state or a big win gaming state). The opening designation command designates the type of small win gaming state or big win gaming state to start (the type of stopped symbol (specifically, one of "small win symbol 1" and "big win symbol 1" to "big win symbol 5")). The opening designation command is sent at the start of the opening period (at the start of a small win gaming state or a big win gaming state).
The round start designation command is a command that designates the start of a round (small win game or round game). The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of a round (small win game or round game).
The round end designation command is a command that designates the end of a round (small win game or round game). The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of a round (small win game or round game).
The ending designation command is a command that designates the start of an ending period and is transmitted at the start of the ending period.
The V winning designation command is a command that designates the detection of the gaming ball passing through the V area. The V winning designation command is transmitted when the gaming ball passing through the V area is detected.
The first look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the type of stopping symbol (one of "miss symbol,""small win symbol 1," and "jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 5"). Here, the first look-ahead designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information).
The second read-ahead designation command is a command that designates the content of the variation mode. Specifically, the second read-ahead designation command designates that the type of variation mode is indefinite ("indefinite value"), or designates one of m types of variation modes (variation mode numbers) ("variation mode m"). The second read-ahead designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.
The third look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the content of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the third look-ahead designation command designates that the type of fluctuation pattern is indefinite ("indefinite value"), or designates one of n types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern numbers) ("fluctuation pattern n"). The third look-ahead designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.

The error specification command is a command that specifies the occurrence of various errors. In this embodiment, the error specification command specifies the occurrence of a vibration error, a magnetic error, a radio wave error, or a right-hit error. The error specification command is transmitted when the occurrence of various errors is detected.
The demo designation command is a command that designates the start of a customer waiting state, and is sent when the customer waiting state starts.
The setting value designation command is a command that designates a setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230. The setting value designation command is sent when the RAM is cleared, when power is restored after being turned on, when the setting change state ends, when the setting confirmation state ends, etc.

The first big prize designation command is a command that designates the entry of a gaming ball into the first big prize opening 54. The first big prize designation command is transmitted each time a gaming ball is detected entering the first big prize opening 54 (each time a detection signal is input from the first count switch 103a). That is, the CPU 210 stores the first big prize designation command in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 through processing not shown each time a detection signal is input from the first count switch 103a. As a result, the first big prize designation command is transmitted to the presentation control board 300 each time a detection signal is input from the first count switch 103a. This makes it possible for the presentation control board 300 to grasp the entry of a gaming ball (a winning ball) into the first big prize opening 54.
The second large prize designation command is a command that designates the entry of a gaming ball into the second large prize opening 55. The second large prize designation command is transmitted each time a gaming ball is detected entering the second large prize opening 55 (each time a detection signal is input from the second count switch 103b). That is, the CPU 210 stores the second large prize designation command in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 through processing not shown each time a detection signal is input from the second count switch 103b. As a result, the second large prize designation command is transmitted to the presentation control board 300 each time a detection signal is input from the second count switch 103b. This makes it possible for the presentation control board 300 to grasp the entry of a gaming ball (a winning ball) into the second large prize opening 55.
The out designation command is a command that designates the discharge of a game ball from the play area 30 (the passage of a game ball through the discharge path). The out designation command is sent every time a game ball is discharged from the play area 30 (every time a game ball passes through the discharge path, i.e., every time a detection signal is input from the out switch 109). That is, the CPU 210 stores the out designation command in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 through processing not shown every time a detection signal is input from the out switch 109. As a result, every time a detection signal is input from the out switch 109, the out designation command is sent to the performance control board 300. This makes it possible for the performance control board 300 to grasp the discharge of a game ball from the play area 30 (out ball).

The main control board 200 and the dispensing control board 400 are connected to each other via a serial communication harness. Communication between the main control board 200 and the dispensing control board 400 is bidirectional. Each control command sent and received between the main control board 200 and the dispensing control board 400 consists of one byte of data.
The main control board 200 then transmits a control command to the dispensing control board 400 via serial communication. When the dispensing control board 400 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and this interrupt processing causes the control command data to be stored in a predetermined area of RAM. The dispensing control board 400 also transmits a control command to the main control board 200 via serial communication. When the main control board 200 receives a control command from the dispensing control board 400, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and this interrupt processing causes the control command data to be stored in a predetermined area of RAM 230.

In the pachinko machine 1, a command to specify the number of prize balls, etc. is set as a control command to be sent from the main control board 200 to the payout control board 400.
The prize ball number designation command is a command that designates the number of prize balls to be paid out. In this embodiment, the prize ball number designation command designates the payout of n prize balls (n = 1 to 15). The prize ball number designation command is sent when the payout control board 400 executes the payout operation of the prize balls.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, control commands that specify the occurrence and cancellation of a payout error, the occurrence and cancellation of a full tank error, the occurrence and cancellation of a ball jam error, etc. are set as control commands that are transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200. Each control command is transmitted when the occurrence and cancellation of various errors is detected.

(Processing executed on the main control board 200)
Next, the processing executed by the main control board 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured on the main control board 200 will be described.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the random number generating circuit 203 starts the hardware random number update process.
In the hard random number update process, the values of the first loop counter to the third loop counter are updated by "1" within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202 (in this embodiment, every 0.083 [μs]).
In addition, in the hard random number update process, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated by "1" within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 10006) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (in this embodiment, every 2.666 [μs]).
Then, the winning random number for the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery, and the reach group random number are updated by the hardware random number update process. Note that the hardware random number update process is executed as a function of the random number generation circuit 203 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.
Furthermore, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the transmission shift registers of the command output ports 1 and 2 start a control command transmission process to transmit the control commands stored in the FIFO buffer to the performance control board 300 or the payout control board 400. The control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Next, a game control process executed by the CPU 210 of the main control board 200 based on a program (software) stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
(CPU initialization process)
First, the CPU initialization process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the CPU initialization process.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in Fig. 10. The CPU initialization process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the CPU initialization process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.

When the CPU initialization process is started, the process first proceeds to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, an initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, a startup program is read from the ROM 220, and settings required for executing various processes, such as register settings, are made.
In the initial setting process, the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and the detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 are read.

Specifically, the value set in the reception memory area corresponding to the RAM clear switch 207 is read twice, and based on the results of these two reads, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 207 is in the ON state. The determination result is then saved as switch information for the RAM clear switch 207. At this time, if it is determined that the ON state is in the ON state, a value indicating that the ON state is in the ON state (in this embodiment, "1") is saved as the switch information; if it is determined that the ON state is not in the ON state, a value indicating that the ON state is not in the ON state (in this embodiment, "0") is saved as the switch information.

The value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the setting key switch 208 is read twice, and based on the results of these two reads, it is determined whether the setting key switch 208 is in an ON state. The determination result is then saved as switch information for the setting key switch 208. At this time, if it is determined that the ON state is in an ON state, a value indicating that the ON state is in an ON state (in this embodiment, "1") is saved as the switch information; if it is determined that the ON state is not in an ON state, a value indicating that the ON state is not in an ON state (in this embodiment, "0") is saved as the switch information.

Furthermore, the value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the inner frame open sensor 108 is read twice, and based on the results of these two reads, it is determined whether the inner frame open sensor 108 is in an ON state. If it is determined that the ON state is not occurring, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that the ON state is not occurring (in this embodiment, "0"). On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state is occurring, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is not rewritten.

In step S1-2, a wait processing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time (3.1 seconds in this embodiment) is set in a timer counter. This causes the timer counter to start measuring the set wait processing time.
In step S1-3, it is determined whether the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has elapsed. If it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-4. If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the process of step S1-3 is repeated.
In step S1-4, RAM access permission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission processing, processing required to permit access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to the access permission is stored as a RAM protect value in the RAM access protection area of the RAM 230. This allows the CPU 210 to access the RAM 230.

In step S1-5, a gaming machine status flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, a gaming machine status flag is acquired.
Specifically, in the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is saved (loaded) into the D register.
In step S1-6, it is determined whether the backup valid flag is normal or not, and if it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal (Yes), it proceeds to step S1-7, and if it is determined that the backup valid flag is not normal (No), it proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, if the value (backup valid flag) stored in the backup valid flag area of RAM 230 is a predetermined valid value, the backup valid flag is determined to be normal, and if the value stored in the backup valid flag area is not the predetermined valid value, the backup valid flag is determined to be abnormal.

In step S1-7, a checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-8. In the checksum calculation process, a checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Specifically, in the checksum calculation process, first, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 out of the backup information.
Next, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-used area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230 out of the backup information.
In step S1-8, it is determined whether the checksum calculated in step S1-7 is normal or not. If it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-9. If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, if both of the following conditions are met: "The checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of RAM 230" and "The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area," the checksum is determined to be normal.
On the other hand, if at least one of the following conditions is not met: "The checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of RAM 230" and "The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area," the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S1-9, a process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is turned on is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-10. In the process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is turned on, the areas other than the setting value area and the gaming machine status flag area (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error-related area, the normal game-related area 1, the normal game-related area 2, and the stack area) are set as the range to be cleared (initialized) in the used area M1 of the RAM 230.
In step S1-10, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 207 is in the ON state. If it is determined that the ON state is not occurring (No), the process proceeds to step S1-11. If it is determined that the ON state is occurring (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-21.
Here, based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 saved in step S1-1, it is determined whether or not the ON state has occurred for the RAM clear switch 207. At this time, if a value indicating that the ON state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the ON state has occurred, and if a value indicating that the ON state has not occurred is saved, it is determined that the ON state has not occurred.

In step S1-11, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-12, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.

In step S1-12, it is determined whether the setting confirmation condition is met, and if it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is met (Yes), it proceeds to step S1-13, and if it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not met (No), it proceeds to step S1-14.
The "setting confirmation condition" is met when a playable state has occurred, the RAM clear switch 207 is not in the on state, the setting key switch 208 is in the on state, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is in the on state.
Here, in step S1-1, if the inner frame open sensor 108 is not in an ON state, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that the ON state is not occurring. As a result, if the ON state is occurring for both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that the ON state is occurring is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. On the other hand, if the ON state is not occurring for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that the ON state is not occurring is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208.
Therefore, in step S1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is met based on the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. At this time, if a value indicating that an ON state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is met, and if a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is saved, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not met.

In step S1-13, a setting confirmation state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the setting confirmation state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting value confirmation state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-14, a process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is restored, the range to be cleared (initialized) in the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is set to include the set value area, the gaming machine status flag area, the normal game-related area 2, and other areas excluding the stack area (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error-related area, and the normal game-related area 1).

In step S1-15, initialization processing upon power restoration is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16, which will be described later.
In step S1-16, a subcommand transmission process upon power restoration is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-17. In the subcommand transmission process upon power restoration, a subcommand (power restoration designation command) specifying that power has been restored from a power interruption is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.
In step S1-17, a dispensing command transmission process when power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the dispensing command transmission process when power is restored, a dispensing command specifying that power has been restored from a power outage is stored in the dispensing command output request buffer of RAM 230.

In step S1-18, a backup abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-19. In the backup abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the backup abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-19, an unused area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-20. In the unused area read/write check process, the unused area M2 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is executed.
In step S1-20, an abnormality clearing target area setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-21. In the abnormality clearing target area setting process, all areas (specifically, the set value area, gaming machine status flag area, checksum area, backup valid flag area, error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area) are set as the range to be cleared (initialized) in the used area M1 of the RAM 230.

In step S1-21, a used area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-22. In the used area read/write check process, the range of the used area M1 of RAM 230 set in step S1-20 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is performed.
Specifically, in the used area read/write check process, all areas of the used area M1 of RAM 230 (specifically, the setting value area, gaming machine status flag area, checksum area, backup valid flag area, error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area) are cleared (initialized).
As a result, a predetermined initial value is set as the value of each counter for the special symbol 1 display symbol counter, the special symbol 2 display symbol counter, and the regular symbol display symbol counter. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to a "losing symbol" is set as the predetermined initial value. That is, a value corresponding to a "losing symbol" corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set as the value of the special symbol 1 display symbol counter, a value corresponding to a "losing symbol" corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set as the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol counter, and a value corresponding to a "losing symbol" corresponding to the regular symbol lottery is set as the value of the regular symbol display symbol counter.

In step S1-22, it is determined whether the results of the read/write checks performed in steps S1-19 and S1-21 are normal. If it is determined that the results of the read/write checks are not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-23. If it is determined that the results of the read/write checks are normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-24.
In step S1-23, a RAM abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the RAM abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the RAM abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-24, it is determined whether the setting confirmation state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred (Yes), it proceeds to step S1-25, and if it is determined that the setting confirmation state has not occurred (No), it proceeds to step S1-26.
Here, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred, and if the value is not corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has not occurred.
In step S1-25, a game-ready state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-26. In the game-ready state setting process, a value corresponding to the game-ready state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.

In step S1-26, it is determined whether the setting change conditions are met, and if it is determined that the setting change conditions are met (Yes), it proceeds to step S1-27, and if it is determined that the setting change conditions are not met (No), it proceeds to step S1-28.
The "setting change condition" is met when the RAM clear switch 207 is in the on state, the setting key switch 208 is in the on state, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is in the on state.
Here, as described above, when the ON state occurs for both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that the ON state has occurred is stored as the switch information for the setting key switch 208. On the other hand, when the ON state has not occurred for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that the ON state has not occurred is stored as the switch information for the setting key switch 208.
Therefore, in step S1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change conditions are met based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1.
At this time, if values indicating that an ON state has occurred are stored for both the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, it is determined that the setting change condition is met. On the other hand, if a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is stored for at least one of the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, it is determined that the setting change condition is not met.

In step S1-27, a setting change state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the setting change state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting change state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-28, a gaming machine status flag saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-29. In the gaming machine status flag saving process, the gaming machine status flag set in the D register is saved in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S1-29, a RAM clear subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-30. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, a subcommand (RAM clear designation command) specifying that a RAM clear has been executed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

In step S1-30, RAM clear initialization processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-31. In the RAM clear initialization processing, initial settings are made for the RAM 230. In the RAM clear initialization processing, the range set in step S1-9 within the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
Specifically, in the initialization process when RAM is cleared, all areas of the used area M1 of RAM 230, excluding the setting value area and the gaming machine status flag area (specifically, the checksum area, backup valid flag area, error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area), are cleared (initialized).
As a result, a predetermined initial value is set as the value of each counter for the special symbol 1 display symbol counter, the special symbol 2 display symbol counter, and the regular symbol display symbol counter. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to a "losing symbol" is set as the predetermined initial value. That is, a value corresponding to a "losing symbol" corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set as the value of the special symbol 1 display symbol counter, a value corresponding to a "losing symbol" corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set as the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol counter, and a value corresponding to a "losing symbol" corresponding to the regular symbol lottery is set as the value of the regular symbol display symbol counter.
In step S1-31, a payout command transmission process when RAM is cleared is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process when RAM is cleared, a payout command specifying that RAM has been cleared is stored in the payout command output request buffer of RAM 230.

In step S1-32, a sub-command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-33. In the sub-command setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command that designates the current gaming machine state is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Specifically, in the subcommand setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command that specifies the gaming machine state flag (gaming machine state) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of RAM 230 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.
In step S1-33, a sub-command group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-34. In the sub-command group setting process, the sub-command group is stored in the sub-command output request buffer in the RAM 230.
Here, the group of subcommands includes a subcommand for specifying the phase when power is restored, a subcommand for specifying the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand for specifying the launch position, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the first special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the second special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 1, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 2, a subcommand for specifying the value of the time-saving counter, a subcommand for specifying the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230, etc.

In step S1-34, an initial display time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-35. In the initial display time setting process, the initial display time of the performance display device 206 is set in the initial display timer.
In step S1-35, an interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to the main loop process (step S2-1). In the interrupt setting process, the CTC (counter/timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is initialized.
Specifically, in the interrupt setting process, an interrupt vector register is set, and an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) is set in the CTC.

(Initialization process when power is restored)
Next, the power recovery initialization process executed in step S1-15 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the initialization process when the power is restored.
When the power recovery initialization process is executed in step S1-15, the process first proceeds to step S28-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S28-1, an initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-3, in which the range set in step S1-14 within the used area M1 of RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
Specifically, in the initialization process, the areas in the used area M1 of RAM 230, excluding the setting value area, the gaming machine status flag area, the normal game-related area 2, and the stack area, other areas (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error-related area, and the normal game-related area 1) are cleared (initialized).
Here, the initialization process does not clear (initialize) the normal game-related area 2. Therefore, the value of the special chart 1 display pattern counter, the value of the special chart 2 display pattern counter, and the value of the normal chart display pattern counter are not cleared (initialized).

In step S28-2, it is determined whether the pattern initialization conditions are met, and if it is determined that the pattern initialization conditions are met (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-3, and if it is determined that the pattern initialization conditions are not met (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S1-16).
In this embodiment, the condition for initializing the symbol is defined as "a state in which a game is not being played (a state in which a game is stopped)."
Specifically, the pattern initialization condition is stipulated as "a state in which special games are not being played (a state in which special games are stopped) and a state in which regular games are not being played (a state in which regular games are stopped)."
Here, "a state in which a special game is not being executed" means a state in which all of the following conditions are met: (1) the first special pattern is not being displayed in a changing state (during the changing time) or a stopped state (during the stopped time) on the special pattern 1 display device; (2) the second special pattern is not being displayed in a changing state (during the changing time) or a stopped state (during the stopped time) on the special pattern 2 display device; (3) the number of reserved special patterns 1 = "0"; (4) the number of reserved special patterns 2 = "0"; and (5) neither a small win game state nor a big win game state is occurring.
"A state in which normal play is not being performed" refers to a state in which all of the following conditions are met: (1) the normal symbol display device is not displaying a changing normal symbol (during the changing time) or a stopped normal symbol (during the stopped time); (2) the number of normal symbols on hold is "0"; and (3) a normal symbol winning play state is not occurring.

Specifically, in step S28-2, (1) in the special game phase flag area for special game 1 described later, a value corresponding to "awaiting special game 1 change" is set, (2) in the special game phase flag area for special game 2 described later, a value corresponding to "awaiting special game 2 change" is set, (3) in the special game phase flag area when winning described later, a value corresponding to "special electric device not operating" is set, (4) the value of the special game 1 reserved number counter described later = "0", (5) the value of the special game 2 reserved number counter described later = "0", (6) in the normal game phase flag area for normal game 1 described later, a value corresponding to "awaiting normal game change" is set, (7) in the game phase flag area when normal game 1 is won described later, a value corresponding to "normal electric device not operating" is set, (8) the value of the normal game reserved number counter described later = "0" is met, if all of the following conditions are met, it is determined that the pattern initialization conditions are met.
On the other hand, if at least one of the above conditions (1) to (8) is not met, it is determined that the symbol initialization condition is not met.

In step S28-3, the pattern initialization process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S1-16). In the pattern initialization process, the values of the special pattern 1 display pattern counter, the special pattern 2 display pattern counter, and the normal pattern display pattern counter are cleared (initialized).
Specifically, in the pattern initialization process, a predetermined initial value is set as the value of each counter for the special pattern 1 display pattern counter, the special pattern 2 display pattern counter, and the regular pattern display pattern counter. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to a "losing pattern" is set as the predetermined initial value. That is, a value corresponding to a "losing pattern" corresponding to the first special pattern lottery is set as the value of the special pattern 1 display pattern counter, a value corresponding to a "losing pattern" corresponding to the second special pattern lottery is set as the value of the special pattern 2 display pattern counter, and a value corresponding to a "losing pattern" corresponding to the regular pattern lottery is set as the value of the regular pattern display pattern counter.

(Main loop processing)
Next, the main loop process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the main loop process.
When the CPU initialization process (step S1-35) shown in Fig. 10 ends, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in Fig. 12. The main loop process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the main loop process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the main loop process starts, the process first proceeds to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, an interrupt disable process is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set, which disables interrupts from other processes. As a result, while the interrupt disable state is set, execution of the power-off save process, timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating initial value random numbers is updated.
Here, "initial value random number" refers to a random number used to determine the initial value and end value of software random numbers (winning pattern random number, reach mode random number, variable pattern random number, etc.), which are random numbers generated on the program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number is updated within a preset range from the initial value to the end value. The initial value and end value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number are changed each time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

In step S2-3, a main command analysis process is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command received from the dispensing control board 400 (the control command sent from the dispensing control board 400 to the main control board 200) is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, a subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer in RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of output port 205 (command output port 1).
As a result, the sub-commands input to the transmission data register are stored in the FIFO buffer.The sub-commands stored in the FIFO buffer are then transmitted to the performance control board 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
In step S2-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt permission process, the interrupt prohibition state is released. As a result, the period from when the interrupt permission process in step S2-5 is executed until when the interrupt prohibition process in step S2-1 is executed becomes an interrupt permission period in which the execution of power-off save process, timer interrupt process, etc. is permitted.
In step S2-6, other random number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update processing, software random numbers excluding winning symbol random numbers (specifically, reach mode random numbers, variable pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

(Evacuation process when power is cut off)
Next, the power-off save process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the save process when the power is cut off.
The main control board 200 is configured to include a power interruption detection circuit (not shown) that monitors the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 600, and outputs a power interruption warning signal to the input port 204 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value.
When the CPU 210 receives the power-off warning signal, it starts the power-off save process shown in Fig. 13 during the interrupt-permitted period of the main loop process. The power-off save process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the power-off save process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the power-off save process is started, the process first proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register save process, the values of the registers used during the execution of the main loop process are saved in a save area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-2, a power cutoff notice signal is read, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power cutoff notice signal read process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value ("1" or "0") set in the reception storage area of the input port 204 corresponding to the power cutoff warning signal is read.
In step S3-3, based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the power cutoff warning signal), it is determined whether or not a power cutoff warning signal has been input from the power cutoff detection circuit.If it is determined that a power cutoff warning signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4; if it is determined that a power cutoff warning signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, output port stop processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5, in which the output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4) is stopped.
Specifically, the output port stopping process initializes the values of all bits contained in the port registers of the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4), thereby stopping the output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4).
In step S3-5, a backup valid flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the backup valid flag setting process, a predetermined valid value is saved in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S3-6, a checksum storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the checksum storage process, a checksum is calculated and stored.
Specifically, in the checksum saving process, a checksum is first calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230. The calculated checksum value is then saved in the checksum area of the RAM 230.
Next, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230. The calculated checksum value is then saved in the checksum area.
In step S3-7, a RAM access prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition process, a process for prohibiting access to the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to the access prohibition is stored as a RAM protect value in the RAM access protection area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

In step S3-8, a loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of times the power cutoff notice signal has been read is set as the value of the loop counter for determining recovery.
In step S3-9, a power cutoff notice signal is read, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the power cutoff notice signal read process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value ("1" or "0") set in the reception storage area of the input port 204 corresponding to the power cutoff warning signal is read.
In step S3-10, based on the value read in step S3-9 (the value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the power cutoff warning signal), it is determined whether or not a power cutoff warning signal has been input from the power cutoff detection circuit.If it is determined that a power cutoff warning signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-11, and if it is determined that a power cutoff warning signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-8.

In step S3-11, a loop counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-12, where "1" is subtracted from the value set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether the value of the loop counter for determining return is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the loop counter for determining return is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the CPU initialization process (step S1-1). If it is determined that the value of the loop counter for determining return is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, register restoration processing is executed, the series of processing is terminated, and the program returns to the original processing. In the register restoration processing, the register values saved in step S3-1 are restored. After the register restoration processing is completed, the program returns to the main loop processing (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Timer interrupt processing)
Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process.
The clock generating circuit 202 generates an interrupt request signal at a predetermined interrupt period (4.0 ms in this embodiment).
In response to the generation of an interrupt request signal, the CPU 210 starts the timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 14 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process. The main loop process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the main loop process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the timer interrupt process is started, the process first proceeds to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during the execution of the main loop process are saved in a save area in RAM 230.
In step S4-2, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt permission process, an interrupt is permitted.

In step S4-3, a dynamic port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4, which will be described later.
In step S4-4, port input processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. In the port input processing, the state of each switch and sensor is acquired.
The RAM 230 is provided with an ON state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3).
In the port input process, it is determined whether or not an ON state has occurred for each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3). Here, "ON state" refers to a state in which a detection signal has changed from a state in which no detection signal is being input (low level) to a state in which a detection signal is being input (high level). At this time, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the switch/sensor has occurred based on the information set in the reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor.
When it is determined that an ON state has occurred for each switch/sensor, "1" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to that switch/sensor. On the other hand, when it is determined that an ON state has not occurred for each switch/sensor, "0" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to that switch/sensor.
In the following description, the value stored in the ON state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor is referred to as the "switch bit data" of that switch/sensor.

In step S4-5, a gaming machine status flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
In step S4-6, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), it proceeds to step S4-7, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), it proceeds to step S4-9.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag acquired in step S4-5. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine state flag has a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.

In step S4-7, it is determined whether an abnormal condition has occurred (set), and if it is determined that an abnormal condition has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-8, and if it is determined that an abnormal condition has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-19.
Here, it is determined whether an abnormal state has occurred based on the gaming machine status flag acquired in step S4-5. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to any of the setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, and backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. If the acquired gaming machine status flag is not a value corresponding to any of the setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, and backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has not occurred.

In step S4-8, a setting-related process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19, which will be described later.
In step S4-9, a timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the timer update process, various timers are updated.
Specifically, the timer update process updates the values of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, security timer, etc.).
In step S4-10, an initial value random number updating process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. The initial value random number updating process in step S4-10 is the same process as the initial value random number updating process in step S2-2.
Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-11, a winning symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the winning symbol random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the winning symbol random number among the software random numbers is updated.
In step S4-12, a switch management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the switch management process, processes (such as obtaining various random numbers) are executed according to the state (whether or not an ON state is detected) of each switch 101, 102a, 102b, 104, and 110. The switch management process will be described later.

In step S4-13, a special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the special game management process, the operation of the special symbol display devices (special symbol 1 display device and special symbol 2 display device) and the operation of the special electric role devices 54a and 55a are managed. The special game management process will be described later.
In step S4-14, a normal game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. In the normal game management process, the operation of the normal map display device and the operation of the normal electric accessory 53a are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.
In step S4-15, a state management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the state management process, various errors (abnormal states) are detected, and settings are made according to the detection results.
In step S4-16, a prize opening switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the prize opening switch process, processes (such as updating various counters) are executed according to the state of each switch 101, 102a, 102b, 103a, 103b, 105, and 106 (whether or not the on state is detected).

In step S4-17, a payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-16, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
In this embodiment, the prize ball control counters include prize ball control counter 1 which stores the number of game balls that have entered the first large prize opening 54, prize ball control counter 2 which stores the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 55, prize ball control counter 3 which stores the number of game balls that have entered the left other prize openings 57a to 57c, prize ball control counter 4 which stores the number of game balls that have entered the right other prize opening 56, prize ball control counter 5 which stores the number of game balls that have entered the first start opening 51, prize ball control counter 6 which stores the number of game balls that have entered the second start opening 52, and prize ball control counter 7 which stores the number of game balls that have entered the third start opening 53.

The payout control management process first determines whether the value of prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or greater. If it determines that the value of prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or greater, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (14 balls in this embodiment) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of the predetermined number of prize balls is sent to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, when the payout of the prize balls by the game ball payout device 440 is completed, the payout control board 400 sends a main command specifying the completion of the payout to the main control board 200. Then, in response to receiving the main command specifying the completion of the payout, "1" is subtracted from the value of prize ball control counter 1.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or greater, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (10 balls in this embodiment) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of the predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, when the payout of the prize balls by the game ball payout device 440 is completed, the payout control board 400 transmits a main command specifying the completion of the payout to the main control board 200. Then, in response to receiving the main command specifying the completion of the payout, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or greater, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (four balls in this embodiment) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to the reception of a main command specifying the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or greater, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to the reception of a main command specifying the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or greater, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (four balls in this embodiment) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is sent to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5 in response to the reception of a main command specifying the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 6 is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 6 is "1" or greater, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 6 in response to the reception of a main command specifying the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 7 is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 7 is "1" or greater, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (four balls in this embodiment) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 7 in response to the reception of a main command specifying the completion of the payout.

In step S4-18, a launch position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the launch position designation management process, processing related to the designation of the launch position is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when a state is changed from one in which the launch of the game ball onto the left path is designated to one in which the launch of the game ball onto the right path is designated (such as when a jackpot game state starts), the launch position designation flag area of RAM 230 is set to "1," and a subcommand designating the launch of the game ball onto the right path is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230. As a result, the subcommand designating the launch of the game ball onto the right path is transmitted to the performance control board 300.
On the other hand, when the state changes from specifying the launch of the game ball onto the right path to specifying the launch of the game ball onto the left path (such as when the time-saving control ends), the launch position designation flag area of RAM 230 is set to "0".
In this embodiment, when "game state A" occurs, "0" is set in the launch position designation flag area, and information specifying the left-hand path as the path along which the game ball should be shot is displayed on the right-hand hit display device.
On the other hand, when "Game State B,""Game State C," or "Game State D" occurs, "1" is set in the launch position designation flag area, and information specifying the right-hand path as the path along which the game ball should be shot is displayed on the right-hand hit display device.

In step S4-19, an external information management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. In the external information management process, external information (external signals) to be output to the hall computer (or data display device) is set.
In this embodiment, the external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (electronic device such as a hall computer or data display device) includes information on the number of times a pattern has been determined, information on the starting port, information on a jackpot, security information, information on the number of payouts from the outlet, information on error occurrence, etc.
The "information on the number of times that the symbol has been determined" is external information on the number of times that the special symbol lottery (variable display and static display of the special symbol) has been executed. The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the information on the number of times that the symbol has been determined to the hall computer (or the data display device) every time the number of times that the static display of the special symbol has been executed reaches a predetermined number.
The "starting gate information" is external information relating to the entry of game balls into the starting gates 51 to 53. Each time the CPU 210 detects the ON state of the detection signal input from the starting gate switches 101, 102a, 102b, it outputs an external signal corresponding to the starting gate information to the hall computer (or data display device).

The "jackpot information" is external information relating to the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state. Each time a jackpot gaming state occurs, the main control board 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to the jackpot information to the hall computer (or data display device).
The "outlet payout information" is external information relating to the number of game balls discharged from the discharge path (or the number of game balls discharged from the outlet 58). Each time the value of the external information out ball number counter reaches a predetermined value, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the outlet payout number information to the hall computer.
The "security information" is external information indicating that a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or various errors (abnormalities) are occurring. When the value of the security timer is "1" or greater, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the security information to the hall computer.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information determination count counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [time] in this embodiment). If it is determined that the value of the external information determination count counter has reached the predetermined value, the symbol determination count information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. Then, the predetermined value (1 [time] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information determination count counter. As a result, the symbol determination count information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, the external information management process determines whether the value of the external information start gate ball scoring counter has reached a predetermined value (1 in this embodiment). If it is determined that the value of the external information start gate ball scoring counter has reached the predetermined value, the start gate information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. Then, the predetermined value (1 in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information start gate ball scoring counter. As a result, the start gate information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information jackpot count counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [time] in this embodiment). If it is determined that the value of the external information jackpot count counter has reached the predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. Then, the predetermined value (1 [time] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information jackpot count counter. As a result, the jackpot information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, the external information management process determines whether the value of the external information out ball count counter has reached a predetermined value (10 balls in this embodiment). If it is determined that the value of the external information out ball count counter has reached the predetermined value, the out port payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. Then, the predetermined value (10 balls in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information out ball count counter. As a result, the out port payout information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
In addition, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to a playable status.
If it is determined that the value stored in the gaming machine status flag area does not correspond to a playable status (i.e., it is determined that the value corresponds to a setting change status, a setting confirmation status, a setting abnormal status, a RAM abnormal status, or a backup abnormal status), the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. As a result, the security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, the external information management process determines whether the value of the security timer is equal to or greater than "1." If it is determined that the value of the security timer is equal to or greater than "1," the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. This causes the security information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer.

In step S4-20, an LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, display data to be output to the main display device 60 or the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with a common 0 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 1 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 2 output request buffer (8 bits), and a common 3 output request buffer (8 bits).
In the LED display setting process, first, the common 2 output request buffer is cleared (initialized), and then the common 3 output request buffer is cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the common 2 output request buffer is set to "0", and each bit value of the common 3 output request buffer is set to "0".
Next, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained.
Then, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to a playable state, a normal state display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to a setting change state, a setting change display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to a setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state), an abnormal state display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed.

In the normal display data setting process, first, the value of the special chart 1 display pattern counter is obtained, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the obtained value of the special chart 1 display pattern counter is set in the common 0 output request buffer.
As a result, the first special symbol is displayed by LED1 to LED8 among the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60.
Next, the value of the special chart 2 display pattern counter is obtained, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the obtained value of the special chart 2 display pattern counter is set in the common 1 output request buffer.
As a result, the second special symbol is displayed by LED9 to LED16 among the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60.
Next, the value of the normal map display pattern counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value of the normal map display pattern counter is set as output data a.
Next, it is determined whether the value set in the special game phase flag area of RAM 230 when a prize is won is a value that specifies one of the special game phases among ``state before large prize opening when a jackpot occurs,'' ``state controlled to open large prize opening when a jackpot occurs,'' ``state in which large prize opening closure is enabled when a jackpot occurs,'' ``state waiting for large prize opening to end when a jackpot occurs,'' ``state before large prize opening is opened when a small prize occurs,'' ``state controlled to open large prize opening when a small prize occurs,'' ``state in which large prize opening closure is enabled when a small prize occurs,'' and ``state waiting for large prize opening to end when a small prize occurs.''
Then, if it is determined that the value set in the special game phase flag area when winning is a value specifying one of the special game phases among "state before large prize opening on jackpot", "state controlled to open large prize opening on jackpot", "state in which large prize opening closure is enabled on jackpot", "state waiting for large prize opening to end on jackpot", "state before large prize opening is opened on small prize", "state controlled to open large prize opening on small prize", "state in which large prize opening closure is enabled on small prize", and "state waiting for large prize opening to end on small prize", the value set in the special pattern determination flag area of RAM 230 (the value corresponding to the type of jackpot pattern) is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data b.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning is a value specifying the "special electric device non-operating state", the output data b is not set.
Next, the value set in the launch position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as the output data c.
Next, the display data (8 bits) obtained by logically ORing the output data a to c is set in the common 2 output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60, LEDs 17 and 18 display normal symbols, LEDs 19 to 23 display the number of rounds of play to be executed during a big win game state or a small win game state (the type of big win game state or the type of small win game state), and LED 24 displays the path (left path or right path) along which the game ball should be shot out.
Next, the value of the special chart 1 reserved number counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data d.
Next, the value of the special chart 2 reserved number counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data e.
Next, the value of the normal map reservation number counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data f.
Next, it is determined whether the power supply has been restored.
Then, when it is determined that the power supply has been restored, the value set in the special chart high probability state flag area is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as output data g.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the power supply has not been restored, the output data g is not set.
Next, the value set in the time-shortening control flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as the output data h.
Next, the display data (8 bits) obtained by logically ORing the output data d to h is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60, LEDs 25 and 26 display the number of reserved special chart 1, LEDs 27 and 28 display the number of reserved special chart 2, LEDs 29 and 30 display the number of reserved regular charts, LED 31 displays the game status when power is restored (whether a high probability state for special charts is occurring or a low probability state for special charts is occurring), and LED 32 displays the current game status (time-saving control is being executed or stopped).

In the display data setting process when the setting is changed, information indicating that a setting change state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and information indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "-" is set in the common 2 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "r", LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "n.", LEDs 49 to 56 display the letter "-", and LEDs 57 to 64 display numbers indicating the set value.

In the display data setting process during setting confirmation, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and information indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) for "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) for "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer. Note that no display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (it remains cleared).
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "r," LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "n," and LEDs 57 to 64 display numbers that indicate the set value. LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

In the abnormality display data setting process, information indicating that an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) for "E" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) for "r." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the display data (error code) corresponding to the abnormal state that has occurred (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is set in the common 3 output request buffer. Note that no display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (it remains cleared).
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LED33 to LED40 display the letter "E," LED41 to LED48 display the letter "r.", and LED57 to LED64 display numbers indicating an error code. LED49 to LED56 are turned off.

In step S4-21, a solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, the control data (drive data) to be output to each of the solenoids 64, 65a, 65b, and 66 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-22, a port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-23. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer, the solenoids 64, 65a, 65b, 66, and the like.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signals, control signals, etc.) set in the port output request buffer is output to the output port 205 (output port 2, output port 3). As a result, the external signals set in the port output request buffer are output to the hall computer. In addition, the solenoids 64, 65a, 65b, and 66 are driven and controlled based on the drive signals set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, an interrupt disable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-24. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set to disable interrupts from other processes. As a result, while the interrupt disable state is set, execution of the power-off save process, timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.

In step S4-24, a test signal output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-25. In the test signal output process, test information (test signal) is set.
The test signal output process is based on a program for executing test-related processes stipulated in the gaming machine regulations. That is, the test signal output process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The test signal output process is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
Specifically, in the test signal output process, test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, execution status of time-saving control, probability state of special pattern lottery, etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230.
In step S4-25, a performance display device control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-26, which will be described later.
In step S4-26, register restoration processing is executed, the series of processing is terminated, and the program returns to the original processing. In the register restoration processing, the register values saved in step S4-1 are restored. After the register restoration processing is completed, the program returns to the main loop processing (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Dynamic port output processing)
Next, the dynamic port output process in step S4-3 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the dynamic port output process.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-3, the process first proceeds to step S29-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S29-1, an output data clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-2. In the output data clear process, the A register is cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the A register is set to "0".
In step S29-2, a main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-3. In the main display device data output process, the value of register A (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 0. This clears (initializes) output port 0, and each data signal ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 goes low.
In step S29-3, a performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-4. In the performance display device data output process, the value of register A (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 4. This clears (initializes) output port 4, and each data signal ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206 goes low.

In step S29-4, a common selection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-5. In the common selection process, the value of the common counter is updated.
Specifically, in the common selection process, it is determined whether the value of the common counter has reached its upper limit ("3" in this embodiment). If it is determined that the value of the common counter has not reached the upper limit, "1" is added to the value of the common counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit, a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the common counter.
In step S29-5, a common output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-6. In the common output process, output data corresponding to the value of the common counter is output to output port 1.
Specifically, in the common output process, when the value of the common counter is "0", output data in which "COM0" is at high level and "COM1", "COM2", and "COM3" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM0" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", output data in which "COM1" is at high level and "COM0", "COM2", and "COM3" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM1" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", output data that sets "COM2" to high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM3" to low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM2" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", output data in which "COM3" is at high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM2" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM3" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".

In step S29-6, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S29-7, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S29-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the value (gaming machine state flag) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.

In step S29-7, a main display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-8. In the main display device data acquisition process, display data for the main display device 60 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the main display device data acquisition process, the value of the common counter is first confirmed, and then the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value from among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer in RAM 230 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in register A.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the main display device data acquisition process is the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer in the LED display setting process (specifically, the normal display data setting process) in step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process.

In step S29-8, a main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-9. In the main display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-7 is output to output port 0.
As a result, data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250a.
That is, the display on the main display device 60 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer).

In step S29-9, an interrupt disable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-10. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set, which disables interrupts from other processes. As a result, while the interrupt disable state is set, execution of the power-off save process, timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S29-10, a performance display device output process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). The performance display device output process will be described later.

In step S29-11, a performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-12. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, the value of the common counter is first confirmed, and then the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value from among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer in RAM 230 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in register A.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer in the LED display setting process of step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process (specifically, the display data setting process when changing settings, the display data setting process when checking settings, or the display data setting process when an abnormality occurs).

In step S29-12, a performance display device data output process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in register A in step S29-11 is output to output port 4.
As a result, data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer).

(Performance display device output processing)
Next, the performance display device output process in step S29-10 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the performance display device output process.
The performance display device output process is based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. In other words, the performance display device output process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device output process is called during execution of the dynamic port output process.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S29-10, the process first proceeds to step S30-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S30-1, a register save process is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S30-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the usage area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM. In addition, the values of all stack pointers used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the usage area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM.

In step S30-2, a performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, the value of the common counter is first confirmed, and then the display data set in the area of the identification segment output request buffer and the ratio segment output request buffer in RAM 230 corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in register A.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the display data set in the identification segment output request buffer or ratio segment output request buffer in the performance display device control process of step S4-25 included in the previous timer interrupt process.

In step S30-3, a performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-4. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in register A in step S30-2 is output to output port 4.
As a result, data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (the discrimination segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (the discrimination segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer).

In step S30-4, a register restoration process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-5. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S30-1 (register values used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the usage area m1) and the stack pointer value saved in step S30-1 (stack pointer value used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the usage area m1) are restored.
In step S30-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the interrupt permission process, the interrupt prohibition state is released, and the execution of the power-off save process, timer interrupt process, etc. is permitted.

(Settings related processing)
Next, the setting-related processing in step S4-8 will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the setting-related processing.
When the setting-related process is executed in step S4-8, the process first proceeds to step S37-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether a setting change state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a setting change state has occurred (Yes), it proceeds to step S37-2, and if it is determined that a setting change state has not occurred (No), it proceeds to step S37-8.
Here, it is determined whether or not a setting change state has occurred based on the value (gaming machine state flag) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that a setting change state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that a setting change state has not occurred.

In step S37-2, a setting value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the setting value acquisition process, the setting values stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 are acquired (loaded), and the acquired setting values are stored in a register.
In step S37-3, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed or not. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-4. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed (No), the process proceeds to step S37-5.
Here, if the RAM clear switch 207 is in an on state, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed, and if the on state is not occurring, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed.
In step S37-4, a set value update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-5. In the set value update process, "1" is added to the set value stored in the register.

In step S37-5, it is determined whether the setting value stored in the register is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (in this embodiment, "6"), and if it is determined that the setting value stored in the register is not less than the predetermined setting comparison value (the setting value is greater than or equal to the predetermined setting comparison value) (No), it proceeds to step S37-6, and if it is determined that the setting value stored in the register is less than the predetermined setting comparison value (Yes), it proceeds to step S37-7.
In step S37-6, a set value initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-7. In the set value initialization process, the set values stored in the registers are overwritten with predetermined initial values ("0" in this embodiment).
In step S37-7, a set value saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-8. In the set value saving process, the set values stored in the registers are saved in the set value area of the RAM 230.

In step S37-8, it is determined whether the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state (is in the OFF state) (No), the process proceeds to step S37-9. If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19).
Here, if the setting key switch 208 is in an ON state, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in an ON state, and if the ON state is not occurring, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in an ON state.
In step S37-9, a subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-10. In the subcommand setting process, a setting-related end designation command (subcommand) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer in RAM 230.

In step S37-10, a sub-command group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-11. In the sub-command group setting process, the sub-command group is stored in the sub-command output request buffer in RAM 230.
Here, the group of subcommands includes a subcommand for specifying the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand for specifying the launch position, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the first special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the second special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 1, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 2, a subcommand for specifying the value of the time-saving counter, a subcommand for specifying a setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230, etc.
In step S37-11, RAM set processing is executed, the series of processing is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step S4-19). In the RAM set processing, the gaming machine state is set to a playable state.
Specifically, a value corresponding to a playable state is saved as the value of the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 (gaming machine state flag).

(Switch management process)
Next, the switch management process in step S4-12 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the switch management process.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-12, the process first proceeds to step S5-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the on state of the gate switch 104 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the gate switch 104 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-2. If it is determined that the on state of the gate switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, a normal starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. The normal starting ball detection process will be described later.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special diagram 1 start port switch 101 has been detected, and if it is determined that the on state of the special diagram 1 start port switch 101 has been detected (Yes), it proceeds to step S5-4, and if it is determined that the on state of the special diagram 1 start port switch 101 has not been detected (No), it proceeds to step S5-5.
In step S5-4, a special drawing 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. The special drawing 1 starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether the on state of the first special chart 2 start port switch 102a has been detected, and if it is determined that the on state of the first special chart 2 start port switch 102a has been detected (Yes), it proceeds to step S5-6, and if it is determined that the on state of the first special chart 2 start port switch 102a has not been detected (No), it proceeds to step S5-7.
In step S5-6, a special drawing 2 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-7. The special drawing 2 starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-7, it is determined whether the on state of the second special chart 2 start port switch 102b has been detected, and if it is determined that the on state of the second special chart 2 start port switch 102b has been detected (Yes), it proceeds to step S5-8, and if it is determined that the on state of the second special chart 2 start port switch 102b has not been detected (No), it proceeds to step S5-9.
In step S5-8, a special drawing 2 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-9. The special drawing 2 starting ball detection process will be described later.

In step S5-9, it is determined whether or not the on state of the V region switch 110 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the V region switch 110 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-10. If it is determined that the on state of the V region switch 110 has not been detected (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S5-10, V-passing detection processing is executed, the series of processing is ended, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step S4-13).
In the V passage detection process, first, it is determined whether or not the V is in a valid period.
Here, the "V valid period" is the period from the start of the first round of play executed during the occurrence of any of the jackpot game states "Jackpot 1" to "Jackpot 4" until the effective time (interval time) for closing the large prize entry port has elapsed after the end of the first round of play.
If it is determined that the V valid period is in progress, the V winning flag area of RAM 230 is set to "1" and the V winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V valid period is not in progress, the process is terminated.

(Normal starting ball detection process)
Next, the normal starting ball detection process in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the normal starting ball detection process.
When the normal starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, it first proceeds to step S6-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S6-1, a normal symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process, a winning random number (random number value) is acquired (loaded) from a loop counter corresponding to the normal symbol lottery.
In step S6-2, it is determined whether the value of the regular map reservation counter is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "1"), and if it is determined that the value of the regular map reservation counter is not the upper limit value (No), it proceeds to step S6-3, and if it is determined that the value of the regular map reservation counter is the upper limit value (Yes), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S5-3).
In step S6-3, the normal map reservation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the normal map reservation counter update process, the value set in the normal map reservation counter is added with "1" and set as a new normal map reservation counter.

In step S6-4, the normal random number storage process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the normal random number storage process, the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored as normal game information in the normal game information storage area of RAM 230.
The RAM 230 is configured to include a regular game information storage area in which regular game information is stored.
The regular game information storage area is configured to include storage areas 0 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing regular game information.
Memory area 0 stores regular game information currently being played. Meanwhile, memory areas 1 to 4 store regular game information for which regular win/loss judgment is pending. The priority of each memory area is specified to be memory area 1, memory area 2, memory area 3, and memory area 4 (highest to lowest), in descending order of priority. Then, regular game information stored in memory areas 1 to 4 is judged to be regular win/loss in order of priority, starting with the information stored in the memory area with the highest priority.

(Special Figure 1 Starting ball detection process)
Next, the special chart 1 starting ball detection process in step S5-4 will be explained.
Figure 20 is a flowchart showing the special chart 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special chart 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, it first proceeds to step S7-1, as shown in Figure 20.
In step S7-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of RAM 230. Also, "1" is added to the value of the external information starting hole ball entry count counter.
In step S7-2, a reserved number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the reserved number counter address setting process, the address of the reserved number counter for special drawing 1 is set in the reserved number counter address setting area of RAM 230.
In step S7-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special diagram 2 starting ball detection processing)
Next, the special chart 2 starting ball detection process in steps S5-6 and S5-8 will be explained.
Figure 21 is a flowchart showing the special chart 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special chart 2 starting ball detection process is executed in steps S5-6 and S5-8, it first proceeds to step S8-1, as shown in Figure 21.
In step S8-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of RAM 230. Also, "1" is added to the value of the external information starting hole ball entry count counter.
In addition, in the special symbol identification value setting process, it is determined whether or not it is during the right-hand hit period. If it is determined that it is not during the right-hand hit period (it is during the left-hand hit period), "1" is added to the value of the right-hand hit error counter.
In step S8-2, a reserved number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the reserved number counter address setting process, the address of the reserved number counter for special figure 2 is set in the reserved number counter address area of RAM 230.
In step S8-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next processes (steps S5-7 and S5-9). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special pattern random number acquisition process)
Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process in steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special symbol random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, the process first proceeds to step S9-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S9-1, a special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, a special drawing reservation number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special drawing reservation number acquisition process, the value (special drawing 1 reservation number or special drawing 2 reservation number) of the special drawing reservation number counter (special drawing 1 reservation number counter or special drawing 2 reservation number counter) specified by the address set in the reservation number counter address area is acquired (loaded).

In step S9-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special symbol random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random value values) such as a jackpot random number, a winning symbol random number, a reach group random number, a reach mode random number, and a variable pattern random number are acquired (loaded) from the loop counters corresponding to each lottery. At this time, the corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, it is determined whether the number of reserved special drawings (number of reserved special drawings 1 or number of reserved special drawings 2) obtained in step S9-2 is the upper limit (in this embodiment, "4"), and if it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings is not the upper limit (No), it proceeds to step S9-5, and if it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings is the upper limit (Yes), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-13 or S5-5).
In step S9-5, a special drawing reservation number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special drawing reservation number counter update process, the value set in the special drawing reservation number counter (special drawing 1 reservation number counter or special drawing 2 reservation number counter) specified by the address set in the reservation number counter address area is added with "1" and the value is set in the special drawing reservation number counter.

In step S9-6, a special symbol random number saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special symbol random number saving process, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored as special symbol game information (special symbol 1 game information or special symbol 2 game information) in a special symbol game information storage area (special symbol 1 game information storage area or special symbol 2 game information storage area) of the RAM 230.
The RAM 230 is configured to include a special chart 1 game information storage area in which special chart 1 game information is stored, and a special chart 2 game information storage area in which special chart 2 game information is stored.
The special chart 1 game information storage area is configured to include memory areas 0 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing special chart 1 game information.
Memory area 0 stores special game information for the currently playing game. Meanwhile, memory areas 1 to 4 store special game information for which start determination is pending. The priority of each memory area is specified as follows, from highest to lowest priority: memory area 1, memory area 2, memory area 3, and memory area 4 (highest to lowest). Then, start determination is performed on the special game information for the currently playing game stored in memory areas 1 to 4 in the order of highest priority, starting with the information stored in the memory area with the highest priority.
The special chart 2 game information storage area is configured to include memory areas 0 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing special chart 2 game information.
Memory area 0 stores special game information for which a game is currently being played. Meanwhile, memory areas 1 to 4 store special game information for which a start determination is pending. The priority of each memory area is specified to be memory area 1, memory area 2, memory area 3, and memory area 4 (highest to lowest) in descending order of priority. Then, for the special game information for which a game is currently being played stored in memory areas 1 to 4, a start determination is performed in order from the information stored in the memory area with the highest priority.

In the special symbol random number saving process, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special symbol 1 game information storage area as special symbol 1 game information. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in an empty storage area among storage areas 1 to 4 (the empty storage area with the highest priority).
That is, if the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "1", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 1. On the other hand, if the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "2", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 2. If the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "3", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 3. If the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 4.
On the other hand, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special symbol 2 game information storage area as special symbol 2 game information. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in an empty memory area among memory areas 1 to 4 (the empty memory area with the highest priority).
That is, if the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "1", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 1. On the other hand, if the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "2", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 2. If the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "3", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 3. If the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 4.

In step S9-7, a reserve number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the reserve number designation command setting process, a reserve number designation command specifying that the special symbol reserve number (special symbol 1 reserve number or special symbol 2 reserve number) has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230. At this time, if the special symbol identification value obtained in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, a reserve number designation command specifying that the special symbol 1 reserve number has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230; if the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, a reserve number designation command specifying that the special symbol 2 reserve number has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

In step S9-8, a pre-determination process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13 or S5-5). In the pre-determination process, various lottery results are pre-determined based on the game information (special game information 1 or special game information 2) (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determination target game information") saved (stored) in the special game information storage area (special game information 1 or special game information storage area) in step S9-6.
In this embodiment, a pre-determination of various lottery results is performed for all game information (special chart 1 game information and special chart 2 game information).
It is also acceptable to configure the system so that advance determination of various lottery results is not performed for game information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of a jackpot game state. Also, it is acceptable to configure the system so that advance determination of various lottery results is not performed for special chart 2 game information acquired (stored) while time-saving control is stopped, and so that advance determination of various lottery results is not performed for special chart 1 game information acquired (stored) while time-saving control is being executed.

In the preliminary determination process, first, a preliminary special drawing hit determination process is executed.
In the advance special symbol hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery ("big hit", "small hit", or "miss") is determined (advance special symbol hit determination).
The ROM 220 stores a special symbol big win lottery table in which big win values of the special symbol lottery are registered, and a special symbol small win lottery table in which small win values of the special symbol lottery are registered.
In addition, special chart jackpot lottery tables corresponding to each combination of the setting value ("1" to "6") and the game state ("special chart low probability state" or "special chart high probability state") are stored.
In addition, as special chart small win lottery tables, a special chart small win lottery table corresponding to special chart 1 game information (first special pattern lottery) and a special chart small win lottery table corresponding to special chart 2 game information (second special pattern lottery) are stored.
In the preliminary special chart hit determination process, first, the preliminary special chart big hit determination process is executed.
In the pre-special chart jackpot determination process, the value set in the setting value area (setting value) and the current game state ("special chart high probability state" or "special chart low probability state") are confirmed, and the special chart jackpot lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read special chart jackpot lottery table, it is determined whether or not a "jackpot" has been won (pre-special chart jackpot determination).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information matches the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "jackpot" has been won (the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be a "jackpot"). On the other hand, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information does not match the jackpot value registered in the special symbol jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "jackpot" has not been won.
If the preliminary special chart big hit determination process determines that the player has not won a "big hit," the preliminary special chart small hit determination process is then executed.
In the preliminary special chart small win determination process, the reserved type (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) of the game information to be pre-determined is confirmed, and the special chart small win lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the game information to be pre-determined and the read special chart small win lottery table, it is determined whether or not a "small win" has been won (pre-special chart small win determination).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information matches the small jackpot value registered in the special symbol small jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "small jackpot" has been won (the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be a "small jackpot"). On the other hand, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information does not match the small jackpot value registered in the special symbol small jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "small jackpot" has not been won.
If the preliminary special symbol small win determination process determines that the "small win" has not been won, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be a "miss."

In the preliminary determination process, next, a preliminary special symbol determination process is executed. In the preliminary special symbol determination process, the type of the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined (preliminary special symbol determination).
If the preliminary special symbol hit determination determines a "jackpot" (winning), the preliminary special symbol pattern determination process determines the type of "jackpot symbol" (preliminary special symbol pattern determination).
A jackpot symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the winning symbol random number and the type of "jackpot symbol" is registered is stored in the ROM 220. In addition, as the jackpot symbol lottery table, a first jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the special symbol 1 game information and a second jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the special symbol 2 game information are stored.
In the first jackpot symbol lottery table, "jackpot symbol 1" and "jackpot symbol 2" are registered as types of "jackpot symbols." On the other hand, in the second jackpot symbol lottery table, "jackpot symbol 3" to "jackpot symbol 5" are registered as types of "jackpot symbols."
If the pre-determined game information is special game information 1, the first jackpot symbol lottery table is read out, and the type of jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read first jackpot symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, if the pre-determined game information is the special game information 2, the second jackpot symbol lottery table is read out, and the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read second jackpot symbol lottery table.
If the preliminary special symbol hit determination determines a "small hit" (winning), the preliminary special symbol pattern determination process determines the type of "small hit symbol" (preliminary special symbol pattern determination).
A small win symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the winning symbol random number and the type of "small win symbol"("small win symbol 1") is registered is stored in the ROM 220. In addition, as the small win symbol lottery table, a first small win symbol lottery table corresponding to the special symbol 1 game information and a second small win symbol lottery table corresponding to the special symbol 2 game information are stored.
When the pre-determined game information is the special game information 1, the first small win symbol lottery table is read out, and the type of the small win symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read first small win symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when the pre-determined game information is the special game information 2, the second small win symbol lottery table is read out, and the type of the small win symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read second small win symbol lottery table.
If the preliminary special pattern hit determination determines that the winning symbol is a "miss" (failed), the preliminary special pattern determination process determines that the type of stopping symbol is a "missing symbol" (preliminary special pattern determination).

In the preliminary determination process, next, a first pre-read designation command setting process is executed.
In the first pre-reading designation command setting process, a first pre-reading designation command that designates the type of the stopping pattern determined by the advance special pattern determination is stored in a sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.

In the preliminary determination process, next, a preliminary special chart variation mode determination process is executed.
In the preliminary special chart fluctuation mode determination process, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined.
In the pre-special chart fluctuation mode determination process, if the pre-special chart hit determination determines a "jackpot," the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined by the pre-winning fluctuation pattern determination process described below.
On the other hand, if the preliminary special drawing hit judgment determines that the winning ticket is a "miss," the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined by the preliminary fluctuation pattern judgment process for when the ticket is lost, which will be described later.
On the other hand, if the preliminary special winning judgment determines that the result is a "small win," the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined by one of the processes of the preliminary fluctuation pattern judgment process when winning and the preliminary fluctuation pattern judgment process when losing. At this time, based on the game state ("game state A" to "game state D") and the hold type (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information), one of the processes of the preliminary fluctuation pattern judgment process when winning and the preliminary fluctuation pattern judgment process when losing is selected.
Specifically, if the result of the preliminary special chart hit determination is "small hit", and the current game status is "game status A", and the hold type of the game information to be preliminary determined is special chart 1 game information, the preliminary change pattern determination process when losing is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the preliminary special chart hit judgment is "small hit", and the current game status is "game status A", and the hold type of the game information to be preliminary judged is special chart 2 game information, the preliminary change pattern judgment process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the preliminary special chart hit judgment is "small hit", and the current game status is "game status B", and the hold type of the game information to be preliminary judged is special chart 1 game information, the preliminary change pattern judgment process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the preliminary special chart hit judgment is "small hit", and the current game status is "game status B", and the hold type of the game information to be preliminary judged is special chart 2 game information, the preliminary change pattern judgment process when losing is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the preliminary special chart hit judgment is "small hit", and the current game status is "game status C", and the hold type of the game information to be preliminary judged is special chart 1 game information, the preliminary change pattern judgment process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the preliminary special chart hit judgment is "small hit", and the current game status is "game status C", and the hold type of the game information to be preliminary judged is special chart 2 game information, the preliminary change pattern judgment process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the preliminary special chart hit judgment is "small hit", and the current game status is "game status D", and the hold type of the game information to be preliminary judged is special chart 1 game information, the preliminary change pattern judgment process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the preliminary special chart hit judgment is "small hit", and the current game status is "game status D", and the hold type of the game information to be preliminary judged is special chart 2 game information, the preliminary change pattern judgment process when losing is selected.

In the pre-winning fluctuation pattern determination process, first, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) is determined (pre-winning fluctuation mode determination).
The ROM 220 stores a winning variation mode determination table in which the correspondence between reach mode random numbers and variation mode numbers (types of variation modes) is registered.
In addition, as a winning time fluctuation mode determination table, a winning time fluctuation mode determination table corresponding to each combination of the hold type (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information), game state ("game state A" to "game state D"), type of stopped pattern ("jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 5" or "small win pattern 1"), and value of the special fluctuation counter is stored.
In each winning fluctuation mode determination table, a fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and a winning fluctuation pattern determination table (information specifying the winning fluctuation pattern determination table) are associated with each reach mode random number. As a result, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the winning fluctuation pattern determination table are simultaneously selected based on each winning fluctuation mode determination table.
In the pre-judgment of the variable mode when winning, first, the hold type of the game information to be pre-judged (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information), the current game state ("game state A" to "game state D"), the type of the stopped pattern judged by the pre-judgment of the special chart pattern, and the current value of the special variable counter are confirmed, and the variable mode judgment table when winning corresponding to the confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read-out winning time fluctuation mode determination table, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the winning time fluctuation pattern determination table are determined.
In the pre-variation pattern determination process at the time of winning, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is next determined (pre-variation pattern determination at the time of winning).
The ROM 220 stores a winning fluctuation pattern determination table in which the correspondence between fluctuation pattern random numbers and fluctuation pattern numbers (types of fluctuation patterns) is registered.
In addition, as the winning time fluctuation pattern determination table, a plurality of winning time fluctuation pattern determination tables with mutually different contents are stored.
In the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination at the time of winning, first, the winning fluctuation pattern determination table determined by the preliminary fluctuation mode determination at the time of winning is read out.
Then, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read-out winning fluctuation pattern determination table.
In this embodiment, the winning fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the "jackpot pattern" specifies the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the "normal reach fluctuation" and the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to the "super reach fluctuation" (the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to the "no reach fluctuation" is not registered).
As a result, when a winning fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to a "jackpot symbol" is selected, a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to a "normal reach fluctuation" or a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to a "super reach fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation pattern number.

In the pre-variation pattern determination process when losing, first, the type of reach group random number contained in the pre-determined game information ('indefinite value' or 'fixed value') is determined (pre-random number type determination).
In this embodiment, the types of reach group random numbers are defined as "indefinite value" and "fixed value."
An "indeterminate value" is a type of reach group random number in which the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are not determined when game information (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) is acquired (stored), and the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined based on the number of reserved balls at that time (special chart 1 reserved number or special chart 2 reserved number) when a start judgment (step S11-12) based on the game information is executed.
The "fixed value" is a type of reach group random number for which the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined when game information (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) is acquired (stored).
In this embodiment, the value of the reach group random number is updated within the range of "0" to "10006." Of the "0" to "10006,""0" to "8499" are set as "indefinite values," and "8500" to "10006" are set as "fixed values."
Therefore, in the preliminary random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number contained in the pre-determined game information is less than "8500", it is determined to be an "indeterminate value", and if it is "8500" or greater, it is determined to be a "fixed value".

In the pre-fluctuating pattern determination process when losing, if the pre-random number type determination determines that the value is "indeterminate," the process proceeds to the next step without performing the pre-reach group determination, pre-fluctuating mode determination when losing, and pre-fluctuating pattern determination when losing, which will be described later.
On the other hand, if the preliminary random number type determination determines that the value is a "fixed value," preliminary reach group determination, preliminary fluctuation mode determination when losing, and preliminary fluctuation pattern determination when losing are performed.

In the preliminary reach group determination, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which correspondence between reach group random numbers and reach group numbers (reach group types) is registered.
Further, as reach group determination tables, a reach group determination table corresponding to an "indefinite value" and a reach group determination table corresponding to a "fixed value" are stored.
In the reach group determination table corresponding to "indefinite values", reach group numbers corresponding to "indefinite values" (hereinafter referred to as "indefinite value reach groups") are registered as reach group numbers. On the other hand, in the reach group determination table corresponding to "fixed values", reach group numbers corresponding to "fixed values" (hereinafter referred to as "fixed value reach groups") are registered as reach group numbers.
In the advance reach group determination, a reach group determination table corresponding to the "fixed value" is read out, and the reach group number (the type of reach group) is determined based on the reach group random number included in the advance determination target game information and the read reach group determination table.

In the pre-fluctuating mode determination when the election is lost, the fluctuating mode number (type of fluctuating mode) is determined (pre-fluctuating mode determination when the election is lost).
The ROM 220 stores a loss-time fluctuation mode determination table in which correspondence between reach mode random numbers and fluctuation mode numbers (types of fluctuation modes) is registered.
In addition, as a loss-time fluctuation mode determination table, a loss-time fluctuation mode determination table corresponding to each combination of reach group number, hold type (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information), hold number (special chart 1 hold number or special chart 2 hold number), game state ("game state A" to "game state D"), and special fluctuation counter value is stored.
In each loss-time fluctuation mode determination table, a fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and a loss-time fluctuation pattern determination table (information specifying the loss-time fluctuation pattern determination table) are associated with each reach mode random number. As a result, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the loss-time fluctuation pattern determination table are simultaneously selected based on each loss-time fluctuation mode determination table.
In the pre-fluctuating mode determination when a player loses, first, the reach group number determined by the pre-reach group determination, the hold type of the game information to be pre-determined (special game information 1 or special game information 2), the hold number corresponding to the hold type of the game information to be pre-determined (special game 1 hold number or special game 2 hold number), the current game status ("game status A" to "game status D"), and the current value of the special fluctuation counter are confirmed, and the pre-fluctuating mode determination table when a player loses corresponding to the confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read-out loss-time fluctuation mode determination table, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the loss-time fluctuation pattern determination table are determined.

In the pre-determination of fluctuation pattern when losing the election, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined (pre-determination of fluctuation pattern when losing the election).
The ROM 220 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for when the winner is unsuccessful, in which the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern random number and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is registered.
In addition, as the unsuccessful election fluctuation pattern determination table, a plurality of unsuccessful election fluctuation pattern determination tables with mutually different contents are stored.
In the pre-fluctuating pattern determination at the time of losing, first, the fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of losing determined by the pre-fluctuating mode determination at the time of losing is read out.
Then, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read-out fluctuation pattern determination table for when the player loses.
Here, the fluctuation pattern determination tail at the time of loss corresponding to the fixed value reach group is specified with the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to "normal reach fluctuation" and the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "super reach fluctuation" (the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "no reach fluctuation" is not registered).
On the other hand, for the fluctuation pattern determination tail at the time of loss corresponding to the indefinite value reach group, a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "no reach fluctuation" is specified as the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) (a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "normal reach fluctuation" and a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "super reach fluctuation" are not specified).
As a result, if a "fixed value" is determined by the preliminary random number type determination, the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to the "normal reach fluctuation" or the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to the "super reach fluctuation" is selected.

In the preliminary determination process, the second and third pre-read designation command setting processes are then executed.
In the second and third look-ahead designation command setting processes, a second look-ahead designation command that specifies the fluctuation mode number determined by the preliminary fluctuation mode determination, and a third look-ahead designation command that specifies the fluctuation pattern number determined by the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination are stored in a subcommand output request buffer in RAM 230.
Specifically, when the pre-winning fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, a second pre-reading designation command specifying the fluctuation mode number determined by the pre-winning fluctuation mode determination, and a third pre-reading designation command specifying the fluctuation pattern number determined by the pre-winning fluctuation pattern determination are stored in the sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.
On the other hand, when the pre-fluctuating pattern determination process is executed and the pre-random number type determination determines that the value is a "fixed value," a second look-ahead designation command specifying the fluctuation mode number determined by the pre-fluctuating mode determination process when the election is lost, and a third look-ahead designation command specifying the fluctuation pattern number determined by the pre-fluctuating pattern determination process when the election is lost are stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.
On the other hand, when a pre-fluctuating pattern determination process is executed when the result of the pre-random number type determination is an "indeterminate value," a second pre-reading designation command specifying an "indeterminate value" and a third pre-reading designation command specifying an "indeterminate value" are stored in the sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.

(Special game management processing)
Next, the special game management process in step S4-13 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special game management process.
In this embodiment, the following are defined as game situations (hereinafter referred to as "special chart 1 special game phase") based on the special chart 1 display device (first special pattern): "special chart 1 waiting state,""special chart 1 changing state," and "special chart 1 stopped pattern display state."
In addition, as game situations based on the special symbol 2 display device (second special symbol) (hereinafter referred to as the "special symbol 2 special game phase"), the following are defined: "special symbol 2 waiting state,""special symbol 2 changing state," and "special symbol 2 stopped symbol display state."
Furthermore, as the phases (hereinafter referred to as "special game phases when winning") related to the game based on the special electric devices 54a, 55a (jackpot game state or small jackpot game state), the following are defined: "state before large prize entry opening when jackpot", "state of controlling large prize entry opening when jackpot", "state of effective closing of large prize entry opening when jackpot", "state waiting for completion of large prize entry opening when jackpot", "state before large prize entry opening when small jackpot", "state of controlling large prize entry opening when small jackpot", "state of effective closing of large prize entry opening when small jackpot", "state waiting for completion of large prize entry opening when small jackpot", and "state of special electric device not operating".

In addition, the RAM 230 is provided with a special game phase flag area for special chart 1, a special game phase flag area for special chart 2, and a special game phase flag area when a win occurs.
In the special game phase flag area of the special game phase flag for the special game 1, a value (special game phase flag for the special game 1) corresponding to one of the special game phases of the "waiting for the special game 1 to change", "special game 1 changing state", and "special game 1 stopped pattern display state" is set (stored). This makes it possible to identify (determine) the special game phase of the special game 1 based on the value set in the special game phase flag area of the special game phase flag for the special game 1.
In the special game phase flag area of the special game phase flag, a value (special game phase flag of special ...
In the winning special game phase flag area, a value (winning special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the following special game phases is set (stored): "state before large prize entry opening when a jackpot occurs,""state controlled by opening of large prize entry opening when a jackpot occurs,""state in which large prize entry opening is closed when a jackpot occurs,""state waiting for large prize entry opening to end when a jackpot occurs,""state before large prize entry opening is opened when a small prize occurs,""state controlled by opening of large prize entry opening when a small prize occurs,""state in which large prize entry opening is closed when a small prize occurs,""state waiting for large prize entry opening to end when a small prize occurs," and "state in which special electric device is not operating." This makes it possible to identify (determine) the winning special game phase based on the value set in the winning special game phase flag area.

Furthermore, ROM 220 stores special game control modules (programs) for controlling (executing) special games, including a special game control module corresponding to each special game phase of special chart 1, a special game control module corresponding to each special game phase of special chart 2, and a special game control module corresponding to each special game phase at the time of winning (excluding the "special electric device inactive state").
Then, in the special game management process, a special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of RAM 230 (special game phase flag area for special chart 1, special game phase flag area for special chart 2, special game phase flag area when winning) is selected, and processing based on the selected special game control module is executed.
Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-13, the process first proceeds to step S10-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S10-1, a special game management process for special game number 2 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. The special game management process for special game number 2 will be described later.
In step S10-2, a special game management process for special game number 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. The special game management process for special game number 1 will be described later.
In step S10-3, a special game management process when a winning bonus is awarded is executed, and the process ends and the process moves to the next process (step S4-14). The special game management process when a winning bonus is awarded will be described later.

(Special Figure 2 Special Game Management Processing)
Next, the special game management process for special chart 2 executed in step S10-1 will be described.
Figure 24 is a flowchart showing the special game management process for special chart 2.
When the special game management process for special chart 2 is executed in step S10-1, it first proceeds to step S40-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S40-1, it is determined whether the special electric device is not in operation, and if it is determined that the special electric device is not in operation (Yes), the process proceeds to step S40-2, and if it is determined that the special electric device is not in operation (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-2).
Here, if the value set in the special game phase flag area of RAM 230 at the time of winning is a value corresponding to the "special electric device inoperative state", it is determined that the special electric device is inoperative state, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the "special electric device inoperative state", it is determined that the special electric device is not inoperative state.

In step S40-2, a target symbol setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-3. In the target symbol setting process, a value (in this embodiment, "1") corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information) is set in the target symbol discrimination flag area of the RAM 230.
As a result, the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information) is set as the type of special pattern to be processed (hereinafter referred to as the "pattern to be processed"), and the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information) is set as the type of special pattern not to be processed (hereinafter referred to as the "pattern not to be processed").
In step S40-3, a special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-4. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 (special game phase of special game 2) is acquired (loaded).
In step S40-4, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-5. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (second special game phase) acquired in step S40-3 is read out.

In step S40-5, a special game control module execution process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-2). In the special game control module execution process, processing based on the special game control module read in step S40-4 is started.
Specifically, in the special game control module execution processing, if the value acquired in step S40-3 is a value corresponding to the "special chart 2 change waiting state", the special chart change waiting processing described below is started, if the value is a value corresponding to the "special chart 2 changing state", the special chart changing processing described below is started, and if the value is a value corresponding to the "special chart 2 stopped pattern display state", the special chart stopped processing described below is started.
At this time, the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information) is set as the symbol to be processed, and the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) is set as the symbol not to be processed, and processing is executed based on each special game module.

(Special Figure 1 Special Game Management Processing)
Next, the special game management process for special chart 1 executed in step S10-2 will be described.
Figure 25 is a flowchart showing the special game management process for special chart 1.
When the special game management process for special chart 1 is executed in step S10-2, it first proceeds to step S41-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S41-1, it is determined whether the special electric device is not in operation, and if it is determined that the special electric device is not in operation (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-2, and if it is determined that the special electric device is not in operation (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-3).
Here, if the value set in the special game phase flag area of RAM 230 at the time of winning is a value corresponding to the "special electric device inoperative state", it is determined that the special electric device is inoperative state, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the "special electric device inoperative state", it is determined that the special electric device is not inoperative state.

In step S41-2, a target symbol setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-3. In the target symbol setting process, a value (in this embodiment, "0") corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) is set in the target symbol discrimination flag area of the RAM 230.
As a result, the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) is set as the symbol to be processed, and the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information) is set as the symbol not to be processed.
In step S41-3, a special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-4. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 (special game phase of special game 1) is acquired (loaded).
In step S41-4, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-5. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (first special game phase) acquired in step S41-3 is read out.

In step S41-5, a special game control module execution process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-3). In the special game control module execution process, processing based on the special game control module read in step S41-3 is started.
Specifically, in the special game control module execution process, if the value acquired in step S41-3 is a value corresponding to the "special chart 1 change waiting state", the special chart change waiting process described below is started; if the value is a value corresponding to the "special chart 1 changing state", the special chart changing process described below is started; and if the value is a value corresponding to the "special chart 1 stopped pattern display state", the special chart stopped process described below is started.
At this time, the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) is set as the symbol to be processed, and the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information) is set as the symbol not to be processed, and processing is executed based on each special game module.

(Special game management process when winning)
Next, the winning special game management process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special game management process when a prize is won.
When the winning special game management process is executed in step S10-3, the process first proceeds to step S42-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S42-1, a special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (the special game phase at the time of winning) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S42-2, it is determined whether the value obtained in step S42-1 (special game phase at the time of winning) is a value corresponding to the "special electric device not operating state", and if it is determined that it is not a value corresponding to the "special electric device not operating state" (No), it proceeds to step S42-3, and if it is determined that it is a value corresponding to the "special electric device not operating state" (Yes), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S42-3, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-4. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (winning special game phase) acquired in step S42-1 is read out.

In step S42-4, a special game control module execution process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game control module execution process, processing based on the special game control module read in step S42-3 is started.
Specifically, in the special game control module execution process, if the value acquired in step S42-3 is a value corresponding to the "state before the large prize opening at the time of a jackpot", the process before the large prize opening described later is started, if the value is a value corresponding to the "large prize opening control state at the time of a jackpot", the process before the large prize opening described later is started, if the value is a value corresponding to the "large prize opening closure valid state at the time of a jackpot", the process effective for closing the large prize opening described later is started, if the value is a value corresponding to the "large prize opening closure end wait state at the time of a jackpot", the process ending the large prize opening described later is started, Wait processing begins, and if the value corresponds to the ``state before large prize opening on small hit'', the pre-opening processing for large prize opening on small hit described below begins, and if the value corresponds to the ``large prize opening control state on small hit'', the pre-opening processing for large prize opening on small hit described below begins, and if the value corresponds to the ``large prize opening closure valid state on small hit'', the large prize opening closure valid processing on small hit described below begins, and if the value corresponds to the ``waiting state to end large prize opening opening on small hit'', the waiting processing to end large prize opening opening on small hit described below begins.

(Waiting for special chart changes)
Next, the special chart change waiting process executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5 will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special chart change waiting process.
When the special chart change waiting process is executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5, as shown in FIG. 27, the process first proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether the value of the reserved number counter corresponding to the pattern to be processed (special pattern 1 reserved number counter or special pattern 2 reserved number counter) is "1" or greater, and if it is determined that the value of the reserved number counter corresponding to the pattern to be processed is "1" or greater (Yes), it proceeds to step S11-2, and if it is determined that the value of the reserved number counter corresponding to the pattern to be processed is not "1" or greater (is "0") (No), it proceeds to step S11-18.
Here, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the special pattern 2 reserved number counter becomes the reserved number counter corresponding to the processing target pattern.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", the special pattern 1 reserved number counter becomes the reserved number counter corresponding to the processing target pattern.

In step S11-2, it is determined whether the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the non-processing target pattern specifies a "jackpot pattern"("jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 6"), and if it is determined that the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the non-processing target pattern specifies a "jackpot pattern" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S11-3, and if it is determined that the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the non-processing target pattern does not specify a "jackpot pattern" (No), the process proceeds to step S11-4.
Here, the RAM 230 is provided with a special chart 1 pattern information storage area and a special chart 2 pattern information storage area.
The "special chart 1 pattern information storage area" sets (stores) pattern information corresponding to the first special pattern (special chart 1 game information).
The "special pattern 2 pattern information storage area" sets (stores) pattern information corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information).
The "symbol information" is information that specifies the type of the stopping symbol determined by the special symbol determination (step S11-7).
Then, in step S11-2, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", it is determined whether or not the pattern information stored in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area specifies a "jackpot pattern".
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", it is determined whether or not the pattern information stored in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area specifies a "jackpot pattern".

In step S11-3, it is determined whether or not a non-target symbol is currently being displayed in a stopped state (during the stopped time), and if it is determined that a non-target symbol is not currently being displayed in a stopped state (No), the process proceeds to step S11-4, and if it is determined that a non-target symbol is currently being displayed in a stopped state (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next step (steps S10-2, S10-3).
Here, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", it is determined whether or not a non-processing target symbol is being stopped and displayed based on the value set in the special symbol 1 special game phase flag area. At this time, if the value set in the special symbol 1 special game phase flag area is a value corresponding to the "special symbol 1 stopped symbol display state", it is determined that a non-processing target symbol is being stopped and displayed, and if it is not a value corresponding to the "special symbol 1 stopped symbol display state", it is determined that a non-processing target symbol is not being stopped and displayed.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", it is determined whether or not a non-processing target symbol is being stopped and displayed based on the value set in the special symbol 2 special game phase flag area. At this time, if the value set in the special symbol 2 special game phase flag area is a value corresponding to the "special symbol 2 stopped symbol display state", it is determined that a non-processing target symbol is being stopped and displayed, and if it is not a value corresponding to the "special symbol 2 stopped symbol display state", it is determined that a non-processing target symbol is not being stopped and displayed.

In step S11-4, a special drawing reservation number update process is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S11-5.
In the special pattern reserve number update process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the reserve number counter (special pattern 1 reserve number counter or special pattern 2 reserve number counter) corresponding to the pattern to be processed.
Here, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", "1" is subtracted from the value of the special pattern 2 reserved number counter.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", "1" is subtracted from the value of the special pattern 1 reserved number counter.
In the special drawing reservation number update process, next, "1" is added to the value of the special variable counter.
In the special reserved number update process, next, "1" is added to the value of the post-jackpot spin count counter.
In step S11-5, a reserved number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the reserved number designation command setting process, a reserved number designation command specifying that the reserved number corresponding to the target symbol (special symbol 1 reserved number or special symbol 2 reserved number) has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.
Here, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", a reserved number designation command specifying that the reserved number of special pattern 2 has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", a reserved number designation command specifying that the reserved number of special pattern 1 has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

In step S11-6, a special symbol memory area shift process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the special symbol memory area shift process, the memory area in which the game information (special symbol 1 game information or special symbol 2 game information) is stored is shifted in the game information memory area (special symbol 1 game information memory area or special symbol 2 game information memory area) corresponding to the target symbol.
Here, if the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the memory area in which the special symbol 2 game information is stored is shifted in the special symbol 2 game information memory area. That is, first, the memory contents of memory area 1 are shifted (moved) to memory area 0. Next, the memory contents of memory area 2 are shifted to memory area 1. Next, the memory contents of memory area 3 are shifted to memory area 2. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 are shifted to memory area 3. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 are cleared (initialized).
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the memory area in which the special symbol 1 game information is stored is shifted in the special symbol 1 game information memory area. That is, first, the memory contents of memory area 1 are shifted (moved) to memory area 0. Next, the memory contents of memory area 2 are shifted to memory area 1. Next, the memory contents of memory area 3 are shifted to memory area 2. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 are shifted to memory area 3. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 are cleared (initialized).

In step S11-7, a setting abnormality determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the setting abnormality determination process, occurrence of a setting abnormality is monitored.
Specifically, in the setting abnormality determination process, first, the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is obtained, and then it is determined whether the obtained setting value is less than a predetermined setting comparison value ("6" in this embodiment).
Then, if it is determined that the acquired setting value is not less than the predetermined setting comparison value (is equal to or greater than the predetermined setting comparison value), a value corresponding to the setting abnormality state is saved as the value (gaming machine state flag) of the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230. Also, a subcommand specifying the occurrence of the setting abnormality is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired setting value is less than the predetermined setting comparison value, the process proceeds to the next step (step S11-8).

In step S11-8, a special symbol winning determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the special symbol winning determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special symbol winning determination) based on the game information (hereinafter referred to as "start determination target game information") stored in memory area 0 of the game information memory area (special symbol 1 game information memory area or special symbol 2 game information memory area) corresponding to the target symbol.
Here, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the special pattern 2 game information stored in memory area 0 of the special pattern 2 game information memory area becomes the game information to be judged as the start.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", the special pattern 1 game information stored in memory area 0 of the special pattern 1 game information memory area becomes the game information to be judged for start.

Specifically, in the special pattern hit determination process, first, the pattern information set in the pattern information storage area (special pattern 1 pattern information storage area or special pattern 2 pattern information storage area) corresponding to the pattern not to be processed is obtained.
At this time, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the pattern information set in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area is acquired. On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", the pattern information set in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area is acquired.
Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired symbol information corresponding to the non-processing target symbol designates a "jackpot symbol"("jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 5").
Then, if it is determined that the pattern information corresponding to the acquired non-processing target pattern specifies a "jackpot pattern," the result of the special pattern lottery is determined to be a "miss" without executing the special pattern jackpot determination process and special pattern small jackpot determination process for the processing target pattern, and the process proceeds to the next step (step S11-9).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pattern information corresponding to the acquired non-processing target pattern does not specify a "jackpot pattern" (specifies a "small jackpot pattern 1" or a "missing pattern"), a special jackpot determination process is first executed for the processing target pattern.
In the special chart jackpot determination process, the value set in the setting value area (setting value) and the current game state ("special chart high probability state" or "special chart low probability state") are confirmed, and the special chart jackpot lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the start determination target game information and the read special chart jackpot lottery table, it is determined whether or not a "jackpot" has been won (special chart jackpot determination).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to start judgment matches the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "jackpot" has been won (the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be a "jackpot"). On the other hand, if the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to start judgment does not match the jackpot value registered in the special symbol jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "jackpot" has not been won.
If the special chart big win determination process determines that the "big win" has not been won, the special chart small win determination process is then executed for the pattern to be processed.
In the special chart small win determination process, the hold type (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) of the start determination target game information is confirmed, and the special chart small win lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the start determination target game information and the read special chart small win lottery table, it is determined whether or not a "small win" has been won (special chart small win determination).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to start judgment matches the small jackpot value registered in the special symbol small jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "small jackpot" has been won (the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be a "small jackpot"). On the other hand, if the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to start judgment does not match the small jackpot value registered in the special symbol small jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "small jackpot" has not been won.
If the special symbol small win determination process determines that the "small win" has not been won, the result of the special symbol lottery for the symbol to be processed is determined to be a "miss."

In step S11-9, a special symbol pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the special symbol pattern determination process, the type of the stopped symbol of the symbol to be processed is determined (special symbol pattern determination).
Specifically, in the special symbol pattern determination process, first, the result of the special symbol hit determination is confirmed.
Then, if the special symbol hit determination determines that there has been a "jackpot" (a win), the type of "jackpot symbol" is determined.
For this purpose, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1," the second jackpot symbol lottery table is read out, and the type of jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the start determination target game information and the read second jackpot symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0," the first jackpot symbol lottery table is read out, and the type of jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the start determination target game information and the read first jackpot symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, if the special pattern hit judgment determines that there is a "small hit" (winning), the type of "small hit pattern" is determined.
For this purpose, if the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1," the second small win symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of small win symbol ("small win symbol 1" to "small win symbol 3") is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the start determination target game information and the read second small win symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0," the first small win symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of small win symbol ("small win symbol 1" to "small win symbol 3") is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the start determination target game information and the read first small win symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, if the special symbol hit judgment results in a "miss" (failure), the type of the stopped symbol is judged to be a "miss symbol."
In the special pattern determination process, next, pattern information specifying the type of the determined stopping pattern is set in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed (special pattern 1 pattern information storage area or special pattern 2 pattern information storage area).
At this time, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", pattern information specifying the type of the determined stopping pattern is set in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", pattern information specifying the type of the determined stopping pattern is set in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area.
In step S11-10, a symbol type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the symbol type designation command setting process, the symbol type designation command that designates the type of the stopped symbol determined in step S11-9 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-11, a special symbol stop symbol number determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the special symbol stop symbol number determination process, the stop symbol number of the symbol to be processed is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a stop symbol number lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the winning symbol random number and the stop symbol number (segment data) is registered.
In addition, as the stop pattern number lottery tables, a stop pattern number lottery table at the time of a big win corresponding to a "big win", a stop pattern number lottery table at the time of a small win corresponding to a "small win", and a stop pattern number lottery table at the time of a loss corresponding to a "miss" are stored.
In addition, as lottery tables for the stop pattern number at the time of a jackpot, a lottery table for the stop pattern number at the time of a jackpot corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information) and a lottery table for the stop pattern number at the time of a jackpot corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information) are stored.
Furthermore, as the stopping pattern number lottery tables corresponding to a "small win", a stopping pattern number lottery table at the time of a small win corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information) and a stopping pattern number lottery table at the time of a small win corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information) are stored.

In the special symbol stop symbol number determination process, first, the result of the special symbol hit determination is confirmed.
Then, when the special symbol hit judgment determines that there is a "jackpot" (a win), the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is checked, and the jackpot stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to this check result is read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the start judgment target game information and the read out jackpot stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, if the special symbol hit judgment determines that there is a "small hit" (win), the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is checked, and the stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to this check result is read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the start judgment target game information and the read out stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, if the special symbol hit determination determines that the player has lost the game, the lottery table for determining the stop symbol number when the player has lost the game is read out.Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information for start determination and the lottery table for determining the stop symbol number when the player has lost the game.
Here, RAM 230 is provided with a stopping pattern number memory area corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information) and a stopping pattern number memory area corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information).
Then, in the stop symbol number determination process, the determined stop symbol number is stored in a stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed.
At this time, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the determined stopping pattern number is stored in the stopping pattern number memory area corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information).
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", the determined stopping pattern number is stored in the stopping pattern number memory area corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information).

In step S11-12, a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-13. In the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process, the fluctuation mode (type of fluctuation mode and type of fluctuation pattern) of the target symbol is determined.
In the special chart fluctuation pattern determination process, if the special chart hit determination determines that the result is a "jackpot," the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined by the winning fluctuation pattern determination process described below.
On the other hand, if the special winning judgment determines that the winning ticket is a "miss," the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined by the fluctuation pattern judgment process when the ticket is lost, which will be described later.
On the other hand, if the special winning judgment determines that the winning is a "small winning," the winning fluctuation pattern judgment process and the losing fluctuation pattern judgment process determine the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern). At this time, based on the game state ("game state A" to "game state D") and the hold type (special winning game information or special winning game information), one of the winning fluctuation pattern judgment process and the losing fluctuation pattern judgment process is selected.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 8(a), if the result of the special symbol hit determination is "small hit", and the current game state is "game state A", and the value set in the target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the loss variation pattern determination process is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is "small hit", and the current game state is "game state A", and the value set in the target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the winning symbol change pattern determination process is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is "small hit", and the current game state is "game state B", and the value set in the target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the winning symbol change pattern determination process is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is "small hit", and the current game state is "game state B", and the value set in the target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the loss variation pattern determination process is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is "small hit", and the current game state is "game state C", and the value set in the target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the winning symbol change pattern determination process is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is "small hit", and the current game state is "game state C", and the value set in the target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the winning symbol change pattern determination process is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is "small hit", and the current game state is "game state D", and the value set in the target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the winning symbol change pattern determination process is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is "small hit", and the current game state is "game state D", and the value set in the target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the loss variation pattern determination process is selected.

In the winning fluctuation pattern determination process, first, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) is determined (winning fluctuation mode determination).
When determining the winning variation mode, first, the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area, the current game state ("game state A" to "game state D"), the type of stopped pattern determined by the special pattern determination, and the current value of the special variation counter are confirmed, and the winning variation mode determination table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information subject to start judgment and the read-out winning time fluctuation mode judgment table, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the winning time fluctuation pattern judgment table are determined.
In the winning fluctuation pattern determination process, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is next determined (winning fluctuation pattern determination).
In the winning fluctuation pattern determination, first, the winning fluctuation pattern determination table determined by the winning fluctuation mode determination is read out.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the game information to be judged as the start and the read-out variation pattern judgment table when winning.
In this embodiment, each winning fluctuation pattern determination table specifies a fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to a "normal reach fluctuation" and a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to a "super reach fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to a "no reach fluctuation" is not registered).
As a result, in the winning fluctuation pattern determination process, the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to the "normal reach fluctuation" or the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to the "super reach fluctuation" is selected.

In the process of determining the fluctuation pattern when losing, first, the type of reach group random number contained in the game information subject to start determination ("indefinite value" or "fixed value") is determined (random number type determination).
In determining the random number type, if the value of the reach group random number included in the game information subject to start determination is less than "8500", it is determined to be an "indefinite value", and if it is "8500" or greater, it is determined to be a "fixed value".
In the process of determining the fluctuation pattern when the winner is unsuccessful, the reach group number (type of reach group) is next determined (reach group determination).
In the reach group determination, if the random number type determination determines a "fixed value," the reach group determination table corresponding to the "fixed value" is read out. On the other hand, if the random number type determination determines an "indefinite value," the reach group determination table corresponding to the "indefinite value" is read out. Then, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined based on the reach group random number included in the start determination target game information and the read reach group determination table.
In the process of determining the fluctuation pattern when the election is lost, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) is next determined (determining the fluctuation mode when the election is lost).
In determining the fluctuation mode when a ball is lost, the reach group number determined by the reach group determination, the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area, the value of the reserved number counter corresponding to the processing target pattern (special pattern 1 reserved number counter or special pattern 2 reserved number counter), the current game state ("game state A" to "game state D"), and the current value of the special fluctuation counter are confirmed, and the loss time fluctuation mode determination table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information to be judged as the start and the read-out fluctuation mode judgment table when the player loses, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern judgment table when the player loses are judged.
In the process of determining the fluctuation pattern when the candidate is unsuccessful, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is then determined (determining the fluctuation pattern when the candidate is unsuccessful).
In the determination of the fluctuation pattern at the time of losing the election, first, the fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of losing the election determined by the fluctuation mode determination at the time of losing the election is read out.
Then, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the game information to be judged as the start and the read fluctuation pattern judgment table when the player loses.
Here, the fluctuation pattern determination tail at the time of loss corresponding to the fixed value reach group is specified with the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to "normal reach fluctuation" and the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "super reach fluctuation" (the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "no reach fluctuation" is not registered).
On the other hand, for the fluctuation pattern determination tail at the time of loss corresponding to the indefinite value reach group, a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "no reach fluctuation" is specified as the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) (a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "normal reach fluctuation" and a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "super reach fluctuation" are not specified).
As a result, if the random number type determination determines a "fixed value," the variation pattern number corresponding to a "normal reach variation" or a "super reach variation" is selected as the variation pattern number. On the other hand, if the random number type determination determines an "indeterminate value," the variation pattern number corresponding to a "no reach variation" is selected as the variation pattern number.

In step S11-13, a fluctuation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-14. In the fluctuation pattern command setting process, a fluctuation mode designation command that designates the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) determined in step S11-12 is stored in a subcommand output request buffer.
In addition, a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) determined in step S11-12 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-14, a special symbol variation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-15. In the special symbol variation time setting process, the time for the variation display of the special symbol is set.
Specifically, in the special chart variable time setting process, first, the variable time (hereinafter referred to as "variable time 1") corresponding to the variable mode number determined in step S11-12 is obtained.
In addition, the fluctuation time (hereinafter referred to as "fluctuation time 2") corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number determined in step S11-12 is obtained.
Then, the total time of the acquired variable time 1 and variable time 2 is calculated, and the calculated total time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed.

In step S11-15, a special symbol variable display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-16. In the special symbol variable display data setting process, data for controlling the variable display of the special symbol display device corresponding to the target symbol is set.
Specifically, in the special pattern change display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the special pattern display timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed.
Next, if the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", a predetermined initial value is set in the special symbol 2 display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special symbol 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol counter is controlled to light up.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", a predetermined initial value is set in the special symbol 1 display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special symbol 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 display symbol counter is controlled to light up.

In step S11-16, a game status update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-17. In the game status update process, the game status is updated.
Specifically, in the game status update process, first, it is determined whether or not the time-shortening control is being executed. At this time, if the value set in the time-shortening control flag area of the RAM 230 is "1," it is determined that the time-shortening control is being executed, and if the value is "0," it is determined that the time-shortening control is not being executed.
If it is determined that time-saving control is being executed, "1" is subtracted from the value of the time-saving counter, and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is "0" or less.
If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is equal to or less than "0," the time-saving control flag area is set to "0," thereby ending the time-saving control.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter is not equal to or less than "0," the state in which "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area is maintained, thereby continuing the time-saving control.
In the game state update process, it is next determined whether or not a special symbol high probability state is occurring. At this time, if the value set in the special symbol high probability state flag area of RAM 230 is "1", it is determined that a special symbol high probability state is occurring, and if it is "0", it is determined that a special symbol high probability state is not occurring.
If it is determined that a special high probability state is occurring, "1" is subtracted from the value of the probability variable counter, and it is determined whether the value of the probability variable counter after the subtraction is "0" or less.
Then, if it is determined that the value of the probability variable counter after subtraction is "0" or less, the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "0". This ends the special chart high probability state and causes the special chart low probability state.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter is not equal to or less than "0", the state in which "1" is set in the special chart high probability state flag area is maintained. This allows the special chart high probability state to continue.

In step S11-17, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2, S10-3).
In the special game phase update process, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", a value corresponding to "special game phase changing state" is set in the special game phase flag area for special game pattern 2.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", a value corresponding to "special pattern 1 changing state" is set in the special pattern 1 special game phase flag area.
In step S11-18, a customer waiting setting process is executed, and the series of processes is ended and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2, S10-3). In the customer waiting setting process, a demo designation command that designates that a customer waiting state has started for the target symbol is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

(Special chart change processing)
Next, the special chart change processing executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the processing during special chart change.
When the special chart change processing is executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5, as shown in FIG. 28, the processing first proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is not "0" (No), it proceeds to step S12-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S12-4.
In step S12-2, it is determined whether the value of the special chart display timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special chart display timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S12-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special chart display timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is not "0" (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2, S10-3).
In step S12-3, the special symbol variable display data update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2, S10-3). In the special symbol variable display data update process, the data for controlling the variable display of the special symbol display device (special symbol 1 display device or special symbol 2 display device) corresponding to the target symbol is updated.
Specifically, in the special chart change display data update process, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", "1" is added to the value of the special chart 2 display pattern counter.
On the other hand, in the special chart change display data update process, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", "1" is added to the value of the special chart 1 display pattern counter.

In step S12-4, it is determined whether the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed specifies a "jackpot pattern"("jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 5") or a "small win pattern"("small win pattern 1"), and if it is determined that the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed specifies a "jackpot pattern" or a "small win pattern" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-5, and if it is determined that the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed does not specify a "jackpot pattern" or a "small win pattern" (specifies a "miss pattern") (No), the process proceeds to step S12-8.
Here, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", it is determined whether the pattern information stored in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area specifies a "big win pattern" or a "small win pattern".
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", it is determined whether the pattern information stored in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area specifies a "big win pattern" or a "small win pattern".
In step S12-5, it is determined whether or not the non-processing target pattern is currently being displayed in a changing state (during the changing time), and if it is determined that the non-processing target pattern is currently being displayed in a changing state (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-6, and if it is determined that the non-processing target pattern is not currently being displayed in a changing state (No), the process proceeds to step S12-8.
Here, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", it is determined whether or not a variable display of a non-processing target symbol is in progress based on the value set in the special symbol 1 special game phase flag area. At this time, if the value set in the special symbol 1 special game phase flag area is a value corresponding to the "special symbol 1 variable state", it is determined that a variable display of a non-processing target symbol is in progress, and if it is not a value corresponding to the "special symbol 1 variable state", it is determined that a variable display of a non-processing target symbol is not in progress.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", it is determined whether or not a variable display of a non-processing target symbol is in progress based on the value set in the special symbol 2 special game phase flag area. At this time, if the value set in the special symbol 2 special game phase flag area is a value corresponding to the "special symbol 2 variable state", it is determined that a variable display of a non-processing target symbol is in progress, and if it is not a value corresponding to the "special symbol 2 variable state", it is determined that a variable display of a non-processing target symbol is not in progress.

In step S12-6, a non-processing target symbol rewrite process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-7. In the non-processing target symbol rewrite process, the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area (special symbol 1 symbol information storage area or special symbol 2 symbol information storage area) corresponding to the non-processing target symbol is rewritten to symbol information specifying a "losing symbol."
Specifically, in the non-processing target symbol rewrite process, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1," the symbol information stored in the special symbol 1 symbol information storage area is rewritten to symbol information specifying a "losing symbol." Also, the stopping symbol number stored in the stopping symbol number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol is rewritten to the stopping symbol number corresponding to the "losing symbol."
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0," the symbol information stored in the special symbol 2 symbol information storage area is rewritten to symbol information specifying a "losing symbol." Also, the stopping symbol number stored in the stopping symbol number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol is rewritten to the stopping symbol number corresponding to the "losing symbol."
In step S12-7, a non-target symbol stop process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-8. In the non-target symbol stop process, the value of the special game timer (the timer measuring the variable time) corresponding to the non-target symbol is set to "0".
Specifically, in the non-processing target symbol stop processing, if the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1," the value of the special game timer corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) is set to "0." As a result, in the next special symbol 1 special game management processing (step S10-2), the variable display of the first special symbol ends, and the stop display of the "losing symbol" begins.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the value of the special game timer corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information) is set to "0". As a result, in the next special symbol 2 special game management process (step S10-1), the variable display of the second special symbol will end and the stop display of the "losing symbol" will start.

In step S12-8, a special symbol stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-9. In the special symbol stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special symbol display device corresponding to the target symbol is set.
Specifically, in the special symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the target symbol is acquired. Then, the acquired stop symbol number is set in the special symbol display device corresponding to the target symbol.
At this time, if the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information) is acquired. Then, the acquired stop symbol number is set in the special symbol 2 display device. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the special symbol 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop symbol number is controlled to light up (stop display).
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) is acquired.The acquired stop symbol number is then set in the special symbol 1 display device.As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the special symbol 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop symbol number is controlled to light up (stop display).

In step S12-9, a special symbol stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12- 10. In the special symbol stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the symbol to be processed.
In step S12-10, a stop command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-11. In the stop command setting process, a stop command that specifies the stop of the target symbol is stored in a subcommand output request buffer. In addition, a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is added to the value of the external information determination count counter.
In step S12-11, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next processes (steps S10-2, S10-3).
In the special game phase update process, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", a value corresponding to the "special game phase flag area for special game pattern 2 stop pattern display state" is set in the special game phase flag area for special game pattern 2.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", a value corresponding to the "special chart 1 stopped pattern display state" is set in the special chart 1 special game phase flag area.

(Processing during special map stop)
Next, the special drawing stop processing executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5 will be described.
Figure 29 is a flowchart showing the processing while the special chart is stopped.
When the special drawing stop processing is executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5, as shown in FIG. 29, it first proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S13-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is not "0" (No), it ends the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2, S10-3).
In step S13-2, it is determined whether the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed specifies a "jackpot pattern"("jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 5"), and if it is determined that the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed specifies a "jackpot pattern" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-3, and if it is determined that the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed does not specify a "jackpot pattern" (No), the process proceeds to step S13-8.
Here, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", it is determined whether or not the pattern information stored in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area specifies a "jackpot pattern".
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", it is determined whether or not the pattern information stored in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area specifies a "jackpot pattern".
In step S13-3, a game status update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-4. In the game status update process, the game status is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, "0" is set in the special symbol high probability state flag area of RAM 230. This causes a special symbol low probability state. Also, "0" is set in the time-saving control flag area of RAM 230. This causes the time-saving control to be stopped. As a result, the game state becomes "game state A."

In step S13-4, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the first special electric role 54a is set.
Special electric role control tables corresponding to each type of "jackpot symbol"("jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 5") are stored in the ROM 220. Each special electric role control table specifies the effective time for closing the large prize opening, the large prize opening closing time, the number of rounds of play, the number of opening/closing switches corresponding to each round of play, the control data (solenoid control data, control time data) for the first large prize opening solenoid 65a corresponding to each opening/closing switch, and the control data (solenoid control data, control time data) for the V-region solenoid 66 during the V-round play.
In the special electric role control data setting process, a special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "jackpot pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed is read, and the read special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
At this time, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "jackpot pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area is read out, and the read out special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", a special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "jackpot pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area is read out, and the read out special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the special electric role continuous operation number counter is then set to "0".

In step S13-5, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-6. In the opening time setting process, a special electric combination control table set in the special electric combination control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game.
In step S13-6, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the opening designation command setting process, an opening designation command that specifies the type of "jackpot symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. In addition, a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is added to the value of the external information jackpot count counter.
At this time, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", an opening designation command that specifies the type of "jackpot pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", an opening designation command that specifies the type of "jackpot pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S13-7, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next processes (steps S10-2, S10-3).
In the special game phase update process, first, the pattern information set in the pattern information storage area (special pattern 1 pattern information storage area or special pattern 2 pattern information storage area) corresponding to the pattern to be processed is set (saved) in the confirmed pattern information storage area of RAM 230, and then the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed is cleared (initialized). At this time, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, pattern information specifying a "losing pattern") is set in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed.
In other words, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the pattern information set in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area is set (saved) in the confirmed pattern information storage area, and then a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, pattern information specifying a "losing pattern") is set in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", the pattern information set in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area is set (saved) in the confirmed pattern information storage area, and then a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, pattern information specifying a "losing pattern") is set in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area.
In addition, in the special game phase flag area when winning, a value corresponding to the "state before the big prize opening when winning" is set.
Furthermore, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", a value corresponding to "special pattern 2 change waiting state" is set in the special pattern 2 special game phase flag area.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", a value corresponding to "special pattern 1 change waiting state" is set in the special pattern 1 special game phase flag area.

In step S13-8, it is determined whether the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed specifies a "small win pattern"("small win pattern 1"), and if it is determined that the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed specifies a "small win pattern" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-9, and if it is determined that the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed does not specify a "small win pattern" (specifies a "losing pattern") (No), the process proceeds to step S13-13.
Here, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", it is determined whether or not the pattern information stored in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area specifies a "small winning pattern".
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", it is determined whether or not the pattern information stored in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area specifies a "small winning pattern".

In step S13-9, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the second special electric role 55a is set.
A special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "small win symbol" is stored in the ROM 220. The special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "small win symbol" specifies the effective time for closing the large prize opening, the time for closing the large prize opening, the number of small win games, the number of opening/closing switches corresponding to each small win game, and the control data (solenoid control data, control time data) for the second large prize opening solenoid 65b corresponding to each opening/closing switch.
In the special electric role control data setting process, a special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "small winning pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed is read, and the read special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
At this time, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "small winning pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area is read out, and the read out special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", a special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "small winning pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area is read out, and the read out special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the special electric role continuous operation number counter is then set to "0".

In step S13-10, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-11. In the opening time setting process, a special electric combination control table set in the special electric combination control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game.
In step S13-11, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-12. In the opening designation command setting process, an opening designation command that designates the type of "small winning symbol" designated by the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
At this time, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", an opening designation command specifying the type of "small winning pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", an opening designation command that specifies the type of "small winning pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S13-12, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next processes (steps S10-2, S10-3).
In the special game phase update process, first, the pattern information set in the pattern information storage area (special pattern 1 pattern information storage area or special pattern 2 pattern information storage area) corresponding to the pattern to be processed is set (saved) in the confirmed pattern information storage area of RAM 230, and then the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed is cleared (initialized). At this time, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, pattern information specifying a "losing pattern") is set in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed.
In other words, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the pattern information set in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area is set (saved) in the confirmed pattern information storage area, and then a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, pattern information specifying a "losing pattern") is set in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", the pattern information set in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area is set (saved) in the confirmed pattern information storage area, and then a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, pattern information specifying a "losing pattern") is set in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area.
In addition, in the special game phase flag area when winning, a value corresponding to the "state before the large prize opening is opened when a small win is achieved" is set.
Furthermore, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", a value corresponding to "special pattern 2 change waiting state" is set in the special pattern 2 special game phase flag area.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", a value corresponding to "special chart 1 change waiting state" is set in the special chart 1 special game phase flag area.
In step S13-13, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next processes (steps S10-2, S10-3).
In the special game phase update process, first, the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed (special symbol 1 symbol information storage area or special symbol 2 symbol information storage area) is cleared (initialized). At this time, a predetermined initial value (symbol information specifying a "losing symbol" in this embodiment) is set in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed.
In other words, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, pattern information specifying a "losing pattern") is set in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, pattern information specifying a "losing pattern") is set in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area.
In addition, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", a value corresponding to "special pattern 2 change waiting state" is set in the special pattern 2 special game phase flag area.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", a value corresponding to "special chart 1 change waiting state" is set in the special chart 1 special game phase flag area.

(Pre-opening process for the big prize slot)
Next, the pre-opening process of the big prize opening executed in step S42-4 will be explained.
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the processing before the opening of the large prize opening.
When the pre-opening process for the large prize opening is executed in step S42-4, the process first proceeds to step S14-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S14-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), it ends the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S14-2, a special electric role continuous operation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric role continuous operation counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter.
In step S14-3, a round start command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start command setting process, the round start command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, a special electric role open/close switching count setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special electric role open/close switching count setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230 is referenced, and the open/close switching count corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation count counter is read. Then, the read open/close switching count is set in the special electric role open/close switching count counter.
In the special electric role opening/closing switching count setting process, the value of the special electric role winning number counter is then set to "0".
In step S14-5, a special electric service open/close switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "big prize opening control state at the time of big win" is set in the special game phase flag area at the time of win.

(Big prize opening control process)
Next, the big prize opening control process executed in step S42-4 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the process for controlling the opening of the large prize opening.
When the special prize opening control process is executed in step S42-4, the process first proceeds to step S16-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S16-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), it proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is not "0" (No), it proceeds to step S16-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, a special electric service open/close switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether the value of the special electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (10 [balls] in this embodiment), and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning number counter has reached the predetermined upper limit value (Yes), it proceeds to step S16-5, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S16-5, the special prize opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the special prize opening control end process, the solenoid control data specifying the power supply stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. This causes the first special electric device 54a to be controlled to a closed state.
In step S16-6, a special prize opening closure effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the special prize opening closure effective time setting process, a special prize opening closure effective time (interval time) is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game by referring to the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S16-7, a round end command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end command setting process, the round end command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to "big prize opening closure enabled state at big win" is set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning.

(Special electric service switching process)
Next, the special electric utility opening/closing switching process of steps S14-5 and S16-3 will be described.
Figure 32 is a flowchart showing the special electric service opening and closing switching process.
When the special electric utility opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5 and S16-3, the process first proceeds to step S15-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S15-2. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S14-6, S16-4).

In step S15-2, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the first special electric role 54a to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric role control data setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230 is referenced to read out solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the special electric role open/close switch count counter. Then, the read out solenoid control data (control data specifying whether to energize or de-energize) is set in a predetermined area of RAM 230. This starts control of the first large winning port solenoid 65a based on the set solenoid data, and the first special electric role device 54a is controlled to an open or closed state.

In step S15-3, a special electric control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special electric control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric role control time setting process, the control time corresponding to the value of the special electric role open/close switch count counter is read by referring to the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game.
In step S15-4, the special electric service switching counter update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S14-6 or S16-4). In the special electric service switching counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the special electric service switching counter.

(Large prize entrance closure effective processing)
Next, the big prize opening closing validity process executed in step S42-4 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the process for validating the closing of the large prize opening.
When the large prize opening closure validity process is executed in step S42-4, the process first proceeds to step S17-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S17-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), it ends the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S17-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached a specified value. If it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S17-3. If it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-5.
Here, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230 is referenced, and the number of rounds of play specified in the special electric role control table is obtained as a specified value and a judgment is made.
In step S17-3, a special prize opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-4. In the special prize opening closing time setting process, a special prize opening closing time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game by referring to the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-4, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before the big prize opening at the time of a big win" is set in the special game phase flag area at the time of a win.

In step S17-5, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the ending time setting process, a special electric combination control table set in the special electric combination control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game.
In step S17-6, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the ending designation command setting process, the ending designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-7, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "waiting state for the end of the opening of the big prize opening when a big win occurs" is set in the special game phase flag area when a big win occurs.

(Wait processing after the large prize opening has finished)
Next, the waiting process for the completion of the opening of the big prize opening, which is executed in step S42-4, will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the large prize opening.
When the waiting process for the completion of the opening of the large prize opening is executed in step S42-4, the process first proceeds to step S18-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S18-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), it ends the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S18-2, a game state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the game state setting process, the game state after the end of the big win game state is set.
Specifically, in the game state setting process, first, a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the special variable counter.
In the game state setting process, next, a probability state setting process is executed.
In the probability state setting process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the V winning flag area of RAM 230.
Then, if it is determined that "1" is set in the V winning flag area of RAM 230, a predetermined number of chances (10,000 in this embodiment) is set as the value of the chance number counter, and "1" is set in the special chart high probability state flag area. As a result, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the special chart high probability state.
On the other hand, if it is determined that "1" is not set in the V winning flag area of RAM 230 ("0" is set), "0" is set in the special chart high probability state flag area. As a result, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the special chart low probability state.

In the game state setting process, next, a time-shortening number setting process is executed.
In the process of setting the number of time-saving times, the type of stopping pattern ("jackpot pattern") specified by the pattern information stored in the confirmed pattern information storage area, the game status at the time of start determination (when a special pattern hit is determined), and the value of the V winning flag area are confirmed, and the number of time-saving times according to the confirmation results is set in the time-saving counter.
In this case, if the stopping pattern is "jackpot pattern 1", the game state at the time of start determination is "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area is "0", the number of time-saving times = 100 [times] is set in the time-saving counter, and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area.
On the other hand, if the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 1", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area = "1", the number of time-saving times = 10,000 [times] is set in the time-saving counter, and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area.
On the other hand, if the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 2", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area = "0", the number of time-saving times = 100 [times] is set in the time-saving counter, and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area.
On the other hand, if the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 2", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area = "1", the number of time-saving times = 10,000 [times] is set in the time-saving counter, and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area.
On the other hand, if the stopping pattern is "jackpot pattern 3", the game state at the time of start determination is "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area is "0", the number of time-saving times = 100 [times] is set in the time-saving counter, and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area.
On the other hand, if the stopping pattern is "jackpot pattern 3", the game state at the time of start determination is "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area is "1", the number of time-saving times is set to 0 [times] in the time-saving counter, and "0" is set in the time-saving control flag area.
On the other hand, if the stopping pattern is "jackpot pattern 4", the game state at the time of start determination is "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area is "0", the number of time-saving times = 100 [times] is set in the time-saving counter, and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area.
On the other hand, if the stopping pattern is "jackpot pattern 4", the game state at the time of start determination is "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area is "1", the number of time-saving times = 10,000 [times] is set in the time-saving counter, and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area.
On the other hand, if the stopping pattern is "jackpot pattern 5", the game state at the time of start determination is "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area is "0", the number of time-saving times = 100 [times] is set in the time-saving counter, and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area.
On the other hand, if the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 5", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area = "1", the number of time-saving times = 10,000 [times] is set in the time-saving counter, and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area.
As described above, if "0" is set in the time-shortening control flag area, time-shortening control is not executed after the end of the jackpot game state, and if "1" is set in the time-shortening control flag area, time-shortening control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state.

In the game status setting process, next, a flag initialization process is executed.
In the flag initialization process, the V winning flag area is set to "0." Also, the value of the post-jackpot spin counter is set to a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment).
As a result of the above, one of the gaming states "gaming state A" to "gaming state D" is set as the gaming state after the end of the big win gaming state.

In step S18-3, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, first, the determined symbol information storage area is cleared (initialized). Also, a value corresponding to the "special electric device non-operation state" is set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning.

(Processing before opening the large prize opening when a small win occurs)
Next, the pre-opening process for the large prize opening when a small win occurs, which is executed in step S42-4, will be explained.
Figure 35 is a flowchart showing the processing before the large prize opening is opened when a small win occurs.
When the pre-processing for opening the large prize opening at the time of a small win is executed in step S42-4, the process first proceeds to step S50-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S50-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S50-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), it ends the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S50-2, a special electric role continuous operation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50-3. In the special electric role continuous operation counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter.
In step S50-3, a round start command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50-4. In the round start command setting process, the round start command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S50-4, a special electric role open/close switching count setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50-5. In the special electric role open/close switching count setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230 is referenced, and the open/close switching count corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation count counter is read. Then, the read open/close switching count is set in the special electric role open/close switching count counter.
In the special electric role opening/closing switching count setting process, the value of the special electric role winning number counter is then set to "0".
In step S50-5, a special electric service switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50-6. The special electric service switching process will be described later.
In step S50-6, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large prize opening control state at the time of small win" is set in the special game phase flag area at the time of win.

(Large prize opening control process at the time of small win)
Next, the process for controlling the opening of the large prize opening when a small win occurs, which is executed in step S42-4, will be explained.
Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the process for controlling the opening of the large prize opening when a small win occurs.
When the process for controlling the opening of the large prize opening when a small win occurs is executed in step S42-4, the process first proceeds to step S51-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S51-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S51-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), it proceeds to step S51-4.
In step S51-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is not "0" (No), it proceeds to step S51-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S51-5.
In step S51-3, a special electric service open/close switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S51-4. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S51-4, it is determined whether the value of the special electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (10 [balls] in this embodiment), and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning number counter has reached the predetermined upper limit value (Yes), it proceeds to step S51-5, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S51-5, the special prize opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S51-6. In the special prize opening control end process, the solenoid control data specifying the power supply stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. This causes the second special electric device 55a to be controlled to the closed state.
In step S51-6, a special prize opening closure effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S51-7. In the special prize opening closure effective time setting process, a special prize opening closure effective time (interval time) is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game by referring to the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S51-7, a round end command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S51-8. In the round end command setting process, the round end command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S51-8, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large prize opening closure enabled state when a small win occurs" is set in the special game phase flag area when a win occurs.

(Special electric service switching process)
Next, the special electric utility open/close switching process of steps S50-5 and S51-3 will be described.
Figure 37 is a flowchart showing the special electric service opening and closing switching process.
When the special electric utility opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S50-5 and S51-3, the process first proceeds to step S52-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S52-1, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S52-2. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), the process ends and the next process (steps S50-6, S51-4) is proceeded to.

In step S52-2, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S52-3. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the second special electric role 55a to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric role control data setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230 is referenced to read out solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the special electric role open/close switch count counter. Then, the read out solenoid control data (control data specifying whether to energize or de-energize) is set in a predetermined area of RAM 230. This starts control of the second large winning port solenoid 65b based on the set solenoid data, and the second special electric role device 55a is controlled to an open or closed state.

In step S52-3, a special electric control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S52-4. In the special electric control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S52-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric role control time setting process, the control time corresponding to the value of the special electric role open/close switch count counter is read by referring to the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game.
In step S52-4, the special electric service switching counter update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S50-6 or S51-4). In the special electric service switching counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the special electric service switching counter.

(When a small win occurs, the large prize opening is closed effectively)
Next, the process of closing the large prize opening when a small win occurs, which is executed in step S42-4, will be explained.
Figure 38 is a flowchart showing the process of closing the large prize opening when a small win occurs.
When the process for closing the large prize opening when a small win occurs is executed in step S42-4, the process first proceeds to step S53-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S53-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S53-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), it ends the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S53-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached a specified value. If it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S53-3. If it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S53-5.
Here, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230 is referenced, and the number of rounds of play specified in the special electric role control table is obtained as a specified value and a judgment is made.
In step S53-3, a special prize opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S53-4. In the special prize opening closing time setting process, a special prize opening closing time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game by referring to the special electric combination control table set in the special electric combination control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S53-4, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before the large prize opening is opened when a small win occurs" is set in the special game phase flag area when a win occurs.

In step S53-5, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S53-6. In the ending time setting process, a special electric combination control table set in the special electric combination control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game.
In step S53-6, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S53-7. In the ending designation command setting process, the ending designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S53-7, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "waiting state for the end of opening of the large prize opening when a small win occurs" is set in the special game phase flag area when a win occurs.

(Wait processing to end large prize opening when small win occurs)
Next, we will explain the waiting process for completing the opening of the large prize opening when a small win occurs, which is executed in step S42-4.
Figure 39 is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the large prize opening when a small win occurs.
When the waiting process for the completion of the opening of the large prize opening at the time of a small win is executed in step S42-4, as shown in FIG. 39, the process first proceeds to step S59-1.
In step S59-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S59-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), it ends the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S59-2, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, first, the determined symbol information storage area is cleared (initialized). Also, a value corresponding to the "special electric device non-operation state" is set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning.

(Regular game management processing)
Next, the normal game management process in step S4-14 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the normal game management process.
In this embodiment, the following are defined as game situations (hereinafter referred to as "normal game phase") based on the normal game display device (normal pattern): "normal game change waiting state,""normal game change in progress state," and "normal game stop pattern display state."
In addition, as the phases (hereinafter referred to as "normal game phase at the time of winning") related to the game based on the normal electric device 53a (normal winning game state), the following are defined: "normal electric device pre-opening state", "normal electric device opening control state", "normal electric device closing effective state", "normal electric device opening end waiting state", and "normal electric device non-operating state".

In addition, the RAM 230 is provided with a normal game phase flag area and a winning normal game phase flag area.
In the normal game phase flag area, a value (normal game phase flag) corresponding to one of the normal game phases, "waiting for normal game change", "normal game changing state", and "normal game stop pattern display state", is set (stored). This makes it possible to identify (determine) the normal game phase based on the value set in the normal game phase flag area.
In the winning normal game phase flag area, a value (winning normal game phase flag) corresponding to one of the winning normal game phases among "normal electric accessory pre-opening state,""normal electric accessory opening control state,""normal electric accessory closing enabled state,""normal electric accessory opening end waiting state," and "normal electric accessory non-operating state" is set (stored). This makes it possible to identify (determine) the winning normal game phase based on the value set in the winning normal game phase flag area.

Furthermore, ROM 220 stores normal game control modules (programs) for controlling (executing) special games, including a special game control module corresponding to each normal game phase and a normal game control module corresponding to each normal game phase when a win occurs (excluding the "normal electric device inoperative state").
Then, in the normal game management process, a normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area (normal game phase flag area, normal game phase flag area when winning) of RAM 230 is selected, and processing based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-14, the process first proceeds to step S55-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S55-1, a normal game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S55-2. The normal game management process will be described later.
In step S55-2, a winning normal game management process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). The winning normal game management process will be described later.

(Regular game management processing)
Next, the normal game management process executed in step S55-1 will be described.
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the normal game management process.
When the normal game management process is executed in step S55-1, it first proceeds to step S56-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S56-1, it is determined whether or not the normal electric device is not in operation, and if it is determined that the normal electric device is not in operation (Yes), the process proceeds to step S56-2, and if it is determined that the normal electric device is not in operation (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
Here, if the value set in the normal game phase flag area of RAM 230 at the time of winning is a value corresponding to the "normal electric device inoperative state", it is determined that the normal electric device is inoperative state, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the "normal electric device inoperative state", it is determined that the normal electric device is not inoperative state.
In step S56-2, a normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S56-3. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 (normal game phase) is acquired (loaded).
In step S56-3, a normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S56-4. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase) acquired in step S56-2 is read out.
In step S56-4, a normal game control module execution process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2). In the normal game control module execution process, processing based on the normal game control module read in step S56-3 is started.
Specifically, in the normal game control module execution process, if the value acquired in step S56-2 is a value corresponding to the "normal map change waiting state", the normal map change waiting process described below is started; if the value is a value corresponding to the "normal map changing state", the normal map changing process described below is started; and if the value is a value corresponding to the "normal map stop pattern display state", the normal map stop process described below is started.

(Regular game management process when winning)
Next, the winning normal game management process executed in step S55-2 will be described.
Figure 42 is a flowchart showing the normal game management process when a win occurs.
When the winning normal game management process is executed in step S55-2, as shown in FIG. 42, the process first proceeds to step S57-1.
In step S57-1, a normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S57-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value set in the win normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 (win normal game phase) is acquired (loaded).
In step S57-2, it is determined whether the value obtained in step S57-1 (normal game phase when winning) is a value corresponding to the "normal electric device not operating state", and if it is determined that it is not a value corresponding to the "normal electric device not operating state" (No), it proceeds to step S57-3, and if it is determined that it is a value corresponding to the "normal electric device not operating state" (Yes), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S57-3, a normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S57-4. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase at the time of winning) acquired in step S57-1 is read out.

In step S57-4, a normal game control module execution process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game control module execution process, processing based on the special game control module read in step S57-3 is started.
Specifically, in the normal game control module execution processing, if the value acquired in step S57-1 is a value corresponding to the "normal electric feature pre-opening state", the normal electric feature pre-opening processing described below is started; if the value is a value corresponding to the "normal electric feature opening control state", the normal electric feature opening control processing described below is started; if the value is a value corresponding to the "normal electric feature closing valid state", the normal electric feature closing valid processing described below is started; and if the value is a value corresponding to the "normal electric feature opening end wait state", the normal electric feature opening end wait processing described below is started.

(Waiting for normal map changes)
Next, the normal map change waiting process executed in step S55-1 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the process of waiting for a change in the general map.
When the normal map change waiting process is executed in step S55-1, the process first proceeds to step S20-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether the value of the regular map reservation counter is greater than or equal to "1", and if it is determined that the value of the regular map reservation counter is greater than or equal to "1" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S20-2, and if it is determined that the value of the regular map reservation counter is not greater than or equal to "1" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next step (step S55-2).
In step S20-2, a process for updating the number of reserved ordinary maps is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the process for updating the number of reserved ordinary maps, the number of reserved ordinary maps is updated.
Specifically, in the regular map reserve number update process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the regular map reserve number counter.
Next, in the normal game information storage area, the storage area in which the normal game information is stored is shifted. That is, first, the storage contents of storage area 1 are shifted (moved) to storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of storage area 2 are shifted to storage area 1. Next, the storage contents of storage area 3 are shifted to storage area 2. Next, the storage contents of storage area 4 are shifted to storage area 3. Next, the storage contents of storage area 4 are cleared (initialized).

In step S20-3, a normal symbol winning/losing determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the normal symbol winning/losing determination process, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined (normal symbol winning/losing determination) based on the normal symbol game information stored in memory area 0 of the normal symbol game information storage area (hereinafter referred to as "game information to be determined").
A normal symbol winning/losing lottery table in which winning values of the normal symbol lottery are registered is stored in the ROM 220. In addition, as the normal symbol winning/losing lottery table, a normal symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to when the time-saving control is being executed and a normal symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to when the time-saving control is stopped are stored.
In the normal winning/losing determination process, a normal winning/losing determination is made based on the winning random number contained in the game information to be determined and the normal winning/losing lottery table corresponding to the current execution status of the time-saving control (ongoing or stopped).
At this time, if the value of the winning random number included in the game information to be judged matches the winning value registered in the regular symbol winning/losing lottery table, the result of the regular symbol lottery is judged to be a "win" (a win).
On the other hand, if the value of the winning random number included in the game information to be judged does not match the winning value registered in the regular symbol winning/losing lottery table, the result of the regular symbol lottery is judged to be a "miss" (losing).

In step S20-4, a normal stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the normal stop symbol determination process, the type of the normal stop symbol (stop symbol number) is determined (normal stop symbol determination).
Specifically, in the normal winning/losing pattern determination process, if the normal winning/losing determination determines that the winning pattern is a "win" (a prize), the type of the stopping pattern (stopping pattern number) is determined to be a "normal winning pattern."
On the other hand, if the normal winning/losing judgment results in a "loser" (failure), the type of stopping pattern (stopping pattern number) is judged to be a "loser pattern."
Next, the type of the determined stop symbol (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
In step S20-5, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process, the type of normal symbol fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is determined (normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process, when time-saving control is stopped, the first type (in this embodiment, the type corresponding to a fluctuation time of 2.0 [s]) is determined as the type of normal map fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number).
On the other hand, when time-saving control is being executed, the second type (in this embodiment, the type corresponding to a fluctuation time of 0.5 [s]) is determined as the type of normal fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number).

In step S20-6, the normal game variable time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the normal game variable time setting process, the variable time corresponding to the type of normal game variable pattern (variation pattern number) determined in step S20-6 is acquired. Then, the acquired variable time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S20-7, a general map change display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the general map change display data setting process, data for controlling the change display of the general map display device is set.
Specifically, in the process of setting the map change display data, first, a predetermined display time is set in the map display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the normal map display pattern counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal map display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal map display pattern counter is controlled to light up.
In step S20-8, the normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game changing state" is set in the normal game phase flag area.

(Processing during normal map fluctuations)
Next, the normal map change processing executed in step S55-1 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the processing during normal map fluctuation.
When the normal map fluctuation processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 44, the processing first proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), it proceeds to step S21-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether the value of the general map display timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the general map display timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S21-3, and if it is determined that the value of the general map display timer is not "0" (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
In step S21-3, the data update process for the map change display is executed, and the process is terminated to proceed to the next process (step S55-2). In the data update process for the map change display, the data for controlling the change display of the map display device is updated.
Specifically, in the normal map change display data update process, "1" is added to the value of the normal map display pattern counter.

In step S21-4, a general map stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the general map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the general map display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol storage area of RAM 230 is obtained.
Next, the acquired stop pattern number is set as the value of the normal map display pattern counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments that make up the normal map display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal map display pattern counter is controlled to light up (stop display).
In step S21-5, a normal game stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the normal game stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, the normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game stop pattern display state" is set in the normal game phase flag area.

(Processing during normal map stoppage)
Next, the normal map stop processing executed in step S55-1 will be described.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the processing during normal map stoppage.
When the normal map stop processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 45, the process first proceeds to step S22-1.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S22-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether the stopping pattern is a "normal winning pattern," and if it is determined that the stopping pattern is not a "normal winning pattern" (No), it proceeds to step S22-3, and if it is determined that the stopping pattern is a "normal winning pattern" (Yes), it proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game phase change waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area.

In step S22-4, a normal electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the normal electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the normal electric role 53a is set.
A normal electric role control table corresponding to the execution status (ongoing or stopped) of the time-saving control is stored in the ROM 220. Each normal electric role control table specifies the time before the normal electric role is opened, the normal electric role closing effective time, the opening end wait time, the number of opening/closing switches, and the control data (solenoid control data, control time data) of the normal electric role solenoid 64 corresponding to each opening/closing switch.
In the normal electric control data setting process, the normal electric control table corresponding to the execution status (ongoing or stopped) of the time-saving control is read out, and the read normal electric control table is set in the normal electric control table area of RAM 230.
Next, the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of RAM 230 is referenced to read the number of times of opening and closing switches. The read number of times of opening and closing switches is then set in the normal electric role opening and closing switch number counter. Also, the value of the normal electric role winning number counter is set to "0".

In step S22-5, a normal electric role release time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the normal electric role release time setting process, a normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined normal electric role release time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S22-6, the normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
In the normal game phase update process, first, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory pre-opening state" is set in the winning normal game phase flag area.
In addition, in the normal game phase flag area, a value corresponding to the "waiting for normal game change state" is set.

(Pre-processing before opening normal electric accessories)
Next, the pre-opening process for the normal electric device, which is executed in step S55-2, will be described.
Figure 46 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening processing of normal electric devices.
When the pre-processing for opening the normal electric device is executed in step S55-2, the process first proceeds to step S23-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S23-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S23-2, a normal electric utility switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The normal electric utility switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release control state" is set in the normal game phase flag area when a win occurs.

(Normal electric device release control processing)
Next, the normal electric accessory opening control process executed in step S55-2 will be described.
Figure 47 is a flowchart showing the normal electric device opening control process.
When the normal electric accessory release control process is executed in step S55-2, it first proceeds to step S25-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S25-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), it proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter is not "0" (No), it proceeds to step S25-3, and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, a normal electric utility switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-4. The normal electric utility switching process will be described later.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether the value of the normal electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 3 [balls]), and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric winning number counter has reached the predetermined upper limit value (Yes), it proceeds to step S25-5, and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S25-5, the normal electric role opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal electric role opening control end process, the solenoid control data specifying the de-energization is set in a predetermined area of RAM 230. As a result, the normal electric role 53a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S25-6, a normal electric role closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the normal electric role closing effective time setting process, a normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined normal electric role closing effective time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S25-7, the normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric device closing enabled state" is set in the normal game phase flag area when a win occurs.

(Normal electric utility switching process)
Next, the normal electric utility switching process in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
Figure 48 is a flowchart showing the normal electric utility opening and closing switching process.
When the normal electric utility opening and closing switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, as shown in FIG. 48, the process first proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S24-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), the process ends and the next process (steps S23-3, S25-4) is proceeded to.
In step S24-2, a normal electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the normal electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the normal electric role 53a to the open state or the closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric role control data setting process, the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of RAM 230 is referenced to read out solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the normal electric role open/close switching count counter. Then, the read out solenoid control data (control data specifying whether to energize or de-energize) is set in a predetermined area of RAM 230. This starts control of the normal electric role solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data, and the normal electric role 53a is controlled to an open state or a closed state.

In step S24-3, a normal electric control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric role control time setting process, the control time corresponding to the value of the normal electric role open/close switch count counter is read out by referring to the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read control time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, the normal electric service switching number counter update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S23-3, S25-4). In the normal electric service switching number counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the normal electric service switching number counter.

(Normal electric device closure effective processing)
Next, the normal electric accessory closure validity process executed in step S55-2 will be described.
Figure 49 is a flowchart showing the normal electric device closure activation process.
When the normal electric feature closure enable process is executed in step S55-2, as shown in FIG. 49, the process first proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S26-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S26-2, the opening end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the opening end wait time setting process, the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined opening end wait time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S26-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release end wait state" is set in the normal game phase flag area when a win occurs.

(Normal electric device release end wait processing)
Next, the normal electric accessory release end wait process executed in step S55-2 will be described.
Figure 50 is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the normal electric device opening.
When the normal electric accessory release end wait process is executed in step S55-2, as shown in FIG. 50, the process first proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S27-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S27-2, the normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric device non-operating state" is set in the normal game phase flag area when a win occurs.

(Performance display device control process)
Next, the performance display device control process in step S4-25 will be described.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the performance display device control process.
The performance display device control process is based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. In other words, the performance display device control process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device control process is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-25, the process proceeds to step S38-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S38-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the usage area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM. In addition, the values of all stack pointers used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the usage area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM.

In step S38-2, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-3, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S38-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the value (gaming machine state flag) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.
In step S38-3, a total out counter increment process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-4.
In the total count counter increment process, it is determined whether or not the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected, "1" is added to the value of the total out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the total out counter is not added.

In step S38-4, it is determined whether or not the specified gaming state is in effect, and if it is determined that the specified gaming state is in effect (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-5, and if it is determined that the specified gaming state is not in effect (No), the process proceeds to step S38-7.
Here, the "predetermined game state" is a game state in which a "special chart low probability state" has occurred, time-saving control is stopped, and a jackpot game state has not occurred.
In step S38-5, a normal out counter increment process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-6.
In the normal out counter increment process, it is determined whether or not the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected, "1" is added to the value of the normal out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the normal out counter is not added.

In step S38-6, the normal prize ball counter addition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-7.
In the normal prize ball counter addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has been detected. Then, if it is determined that the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is added by "4", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of a game ball into the first start port 51. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether the on state of the first special figure 2 start port switch 102a has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the first special figure 2 start port switch 102a has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is incremented by "4", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to a game ball entering the second start port 52. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the first special figure 2 start port switch 102a has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not incremented.
Next, it is determined whether the on state of the second special figure 2 start port switch 102b has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the second special figure 2 start port switch 102b has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is incremented by "1", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to a game ball entering the third start port 53. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the second special figure 2 start port switch 102b has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not incremented.

Next, it is determined whether or not the on state of the right prize entrance switch 105 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the right prize entrance switch 105 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is incremented by "1", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to a game ball entering the right other prize entrance 56. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the right prize entrance switch 105 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not incremented.
Next, it is determined whether or not the on state of the left prize entrance switch 106 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the left prize entrance switch 106 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is incremented by "4," which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to game balls entering the left other prize entrances 57a to 57c. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the left prize entrance switch 106 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not incremented.

In step S38-7, it is determined whether the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value (Yes), it proceeds to step S38-8, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has not reached the reference value (No), it proceeds to step S38-9.
In this embodiment, the reference value is 60000×n (n = integer), where "n" is a value indicating the current interval, and is initially set to "1."
In step S38-8, a section update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-9. In the section update process, the section is updated.
In the interval update process, first, the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230 is shifted (moved) to the base value buffer 2 of the RAM 230 .
Next, a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the normal out counter. Also, a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the normal prize ball counter.
Next, "1" is added to the value (n) indicating the current interval, thereby updating the reference value.

In step S38-9, a base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-10. In the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated.
Specifically, in the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated based on the value of the normal out counter and the value of the normal prize ball counter. The calculated base ratio is then stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230.
Here, the base ratio is the ratio of the value of the normal prize ball counter to the value of the normal out counter.

In step S38-10, a base ratio display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-11. In the base ratio display data setting process, display data to be output to the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with a discrimination segment output request buffer (16 bits) and a ratio segment output request buffer (16 bits).
In the base ratio display data setting process, first, it is selected which base ratio to display, the base ratio for the current section or the base ratio for the previous section.
Then, when the display of the base ratio of the current section is selected, information indicating that this is the base ratio of the current section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set in the ratio segment output request buffer.

Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the ones digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "b," LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "b," LEDs 49 to 56 display a number indicating the tens digit of the current base ratio, and LEDs 57 to 64 display a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio.

On the other hand, if the display of the base ratio of the previous section is selected, information indicating that it is the base ratio of the previous section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "c" is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the ones digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "b," LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "c," LEDs 49 to 56 display a number indicating the tens digit of the current base ratio, and LEDs 57 to 64 display a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio.

In step S38-11, a register restoration process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-12. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S38-1 (register values used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the usage area m1) and the stack pointer value saved in step S38-1 (stack pointer value used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the usage area m1) are restored.
In step S38-12, interrupt permission processing is executed, the series of processing is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step S4-26). In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt prohibition state is released, and the execution of power-off save processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. is permitted.

(Various effects executed in the pachinko machine 1)
Next, various effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.

(Holding performance)
First, the hold effect (hold display) executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
In the pachinko machine 1, a hold effect is executed for each piece of game information (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) stored in the game information storage area (special chart 1 game information storage area and special chart 2 game information storage area).
The hold effect is an effect that suggests (notifies) that the notification display (start determination) of a special pattern based on the game information that is the target of the hold effect (hereinafter referred to as ``hold effect target game information'') is on hold, or that the notification display (variable display or stopped display) of a special pattern based on the hold effect target game information is currently being executed.
In the reserved effect, a reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed in the reserved symbol display areas b1 and b2.

Specifically, in the reserved pattern display area b1, display positions (display sections) where the reserved pattern h is displayed are specified, which correspond to each of the five memory areas (memory area 0 to memory area 4) of the special pattern 1 game information memory area.
In addition, in the reserved pattern display area b2, display positions (display sections) where the reserved pattern h is displayed are specified to correspond to each of the five memory areas (memory area 0 to memory area 4) of the special pattern 2 game information memory area.
In a hold effect in which the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information) is the target game information for the hold effect, a hold pattern h corresponding to the target game information for the hold effect is displayed in the hold pattern display area b1.
In other words, during the period when the game information to be held for effect is stored in each memory area (memory area 0 to memory area 4), the reserved pattern h corresponding to the game information to be held for effect is displayed in the reserved pattern display area b1 at the position corresponding to the memory area.
As a result, in the reserved pattern display area b1, at positions corresponding to memory areas 1 to 4, reserved patterns h corresponding to the special pattern 1 game information in which the notification display (start determination) of the special pattern is reserved are displayed, and at the position corresponding to memory area 0, reserved patterns h corresponding to the special pattern 1 game information in which the notification display (variable display or stop display) of the special pattern is being executed are displayed.
On the other hand, in a hold effect in which the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information) is the target hold effect game information, a hold pattern h corresponding to the hold effect target game information is displayed in the hold pattern display area b2.
In other words, during the period when the game information to be held for effect is stored in each memory area (memory area 0 to memory area 4), the reserved pattern h corresponding to the game information to be held for effect is displayed in the reserved pattern display area b2 at the position corresponding to the memory area.
As a result, in the reserved pattern display area b2, at positions corresponding to memory areas 1 to 4, reserved patterns h corresponding to the special pattern 2 game information in which the notification display (start determination) of the special pattern is pending are displayed, and at the position corresponding to memory area 0, reserved patterns h corresponding to the special pattern 2 game information in which the notification display (variable display or stop display) of the special pattern is currently being executed are displayed.

For example, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored as special chart 1 game information in memory area 3 of the special chart 1 game information storage area, and when a hold effect targeting the special chart 1 game information is executed, upon start of the hold effect, a hold pattern h corresponding to the hold effect target game information is displayed in the hold pattern display area b1 at a position corresponding to memory area 3.
Thereafter, in response to the shifting of the memory area for storing the game information to be subjected to reserved performance from the memory area 3 to the memory area 2, the display position of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the game information to be subjected to reserved performance is shifted from the position corresponding to the memory area 3 to the position corresponding to the memory area 2.
In addition, in response to the shift of the memory area storing the game information to be subjected to reserved performance from memory area 2 to memory area 1, the display position of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the game information to be subjected to reserved performance is shifted from the position corresponding to memory area 2 to the position corresponding to memory area 1.
Furthermore, in response to the shifting of the memory area for storing the game information to be subjected to reserved performance from memory area 1 to memory area 0, the display position of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the game information to be subjected to reserved performance is shifted from the position corresponding to memory area 1 to the position corresponding to memory area 0.
Then, in response to the completion of the stop display of the special symbol based on the reserved effect target game information, the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information in the reserved symbol display area b1 (the position corresponding to the memory area 0) is completed. This ends the reserved effect.

In this embodiment, the types of hold effects are defined as normal hold effects and hold notice effects.
The "normal hold effect" is a type of hold effect that does not suggest the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the game information for the hold effect.
In this embodiment, the types (modes) of reserved pattern h are defined as normal reserved and special reserved.
In the normal hold effect, a normal hold is displayed as a hold pattern h corresponding to the game information for the hold effect.
A normal hold effect is started when the game information for the hold effect target (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) is stored in the game information storage area (special chart 1 game information storage area or special chart 2 game information storage area), and is ended when the stopped display of the special pattern based on the game information for the hold effect ends.

(Hold notice effect)
The "hold notice effect" is a type of pre-reading notice effect. That is, the hold notice effect is a type of hold effect that indicates the result of the advance determination (step S9-8) based on predetermined game information by the mode (display mode) of the hold symbol h corresponding to the game information.
In the following description, the game information that is the target of the reserved advance notice effect will be referred to as the “pre-notification target game information.” Furthermore, the reserved symbol h that corresponds to the pre-notification target game information will be referred to as the “pre-notification target reserved symbol hy.”
The pending notice effect is an effect that suggests the result of a preliminary special symbol pattern determination based on the game information to be notified (specifically, the possibility that it is a "jackpot symbol").
In addition, the pending notice effect may be configured to suggest the result of a preliminary determination of the special chart change pattern based on the game information to be notified (specifically, the possibility of a "super reach change").
In the hold preview performance, a special hold is displayed as the preview target hold pattern hy.
In this embodiment, the following special hold modes (types) are defined: "blue hold,""greenhold,""purplehold," and "red hold."
In the hold preview performance, the state of the preview target hold pattern hy changes, and the state of the preview target hold pattern hy that is finally displayed suggests the result of the advance judgment based on the preview target game information (specifically, the possibility that a jackpot game state will occur).
Here, the expectation level for each type of special reserve is specified as follows, in order of highest jackpot expectation: "red reserve,""purplereserve,""greenreserve," and "blue reserve" (high jackpot expectation → low jackpot expectation).

When the hold notice performance is executed, one or more hold change triggers and hold change contents corresponding to each hold change trigger are set. Then, in the hold notice performance, in response to the arrival of each hold change trigger, the state of the hold pattern hy to be notified changes according to the hold change contents corresponding to the hold change trigger.
The "reserved change trigger" is a trigger for changing the state of the reserved symbol hy to be notified. Also, the "reserved change content" is a content for changing the state of the reserved symbol hy to be notified.
In this embodiment, the hold change trigger is defined as the start of a change effect corresponding to each advance hold information, the start of a change effect corresponding to the notice target game information, etc. Then, when the hold notice effect is executed, one or more hold change triggers are set from among these hold change triggers.
In this embodiment, the hold notice performance is executed only for the special chart 2 game information out of the special chart 1 game information and the special chart 2 game information.

(Variable effects)
Next, each aspect of the variable effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
As described above, the display screen 31a can be configured to have a performance pattern display area A in which performance patterns z1, z2 corresponding to the first special pattern are displayed, and a performance pattern display area B in which performance patterns z1, z2 corresponding to the second special pattern are displayed.
In addition, each of the effect pattern display areas A and B is composed of three first effect pattern display areas a1 to a3 in which the first effect pattern z1 is displayed, and one second effect pattern display area a4 in which the second effect pattern z2 is displayed.
In the following explanation, in each performance pattern display area A, B, the first performance pattern z1 displayed in the first performance pattern display area a1 will be referred to as the "left pattern," the first performance pattern z1 displayed in the first performance pattern display area a2 will be referred to as the "middle pattern," and the first performance pattern z1 displayed in the first performance pattern display area a3 will be referred to as the "right pattern."
In addition, in the second performance pattern display area a4 of each performance pattern display area A, B, the second performance pattern z2 is constantly displayed in a changing state while the changing performance (first half changing performance and second half changing performance) is being executed.

First, we will explain each aspect of the first half variable presentation.
In this embodiment, the variation mode numbers (variation mode types) are defined as a variation mode number corresponding to "variation without pseudo consecutive hits," a variation mode number corresponding to "variation with two pseudo consecutive hits," and a variation mode number corresponding to "variation with three pseudo consecutive hits."
In addition, the types (variation performance numbers) of the first half variation performance are specified as "variation performance without pseudo consecutive wins,""variation performance with pseudo consecutive wins 2," and "variation performance with pseudo consecutive wins 3."
When the fluctuation mode number corresponding to "fluctuating without pseudo consecutive wins" is specified by the fluctuation mode specification command, "fluctuating without pseudo consecutive wins" is selected as the mode of the first half fluctuation performance. On the other hand, when the fluctuation mode number corresponding to "fluctuating with pseudo consecutive wins 2" is specified by the fluctuation mode specification command, "fluctuating with pseudo consecutive wins 2" is selected as the mode of the first half fluctuation performance.
On the other hand, if the fluctuation mode number corresponding to "pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation" is specified by the fluctuation mode specification command, "pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation presentation" is selected as the form of the first half fluctuation presentation.
Here, the "no pseudo consecutive change effect", "pseudo consecutive 2 change effect" and "pseudo consecutive 3 change effect" can be executed regardless of the game state ("game state A" to "game state D").

The "pseudo non-consecutive variable effect" is composed of normal variable effects.
The "normal variation effect" refers to a display effect in which the first effect symbol z1 is normally displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. Specifically, in the normal variation effect, the left, middle, and right symbols are normally displayed in a variable manner.
"Normal variable display" refers to a display in which the type of first effect pattern z1 displayed at the lottery result display position of the first effect pattern display areas a1 to a3 is sequentially changed.
The "lottery result display position" refers to the position where the first effect pattern z1 is displayed in a stopped state in the stop effect described below.
In the "pseudo non-consecutive fluctuation effect", the "normal fluctuation effect" starts in response to its start. Then, in the "pseudo non-consecutive fluctuation effect", the normal fluctuation display of the left, middle and right symbols ("normal fluctuation effect") continues until the end of the "pseudo non-consecutive fluctuation effect".
In addition, in the "pseudo non-consecutive variable effect", the pseudo variable effect described below is not executed.
The "pseudo continuous variation effect"("pseudo continuous 2 variation effect" and "pseudo continuous 3 variation effect") is an effect in which the variation display of the first effect pattern z1 is executed multiple times in a simulated manner during the execution of one variation display of the special pattern. Specifically, the pseudo continuous variation effect is configured to include multiple pseudo variation effects.
The "pseudo consecutive 2-variation effect" is configured to include two pseudo-variation effects. The "pseudo consecutive 3-variation effect" is configured to include three pseudo-variation effects.
In the following explanation, the final pseudo-fluctuation effect of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation effects included in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation effects will be referred to as the "final pseudo-fluctuation effect." Also, the pseudo-fluctuation effects of each of the pseudo-fluctuation effects included in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation effects, excluding the final pseudo-fluctuation effect, will be referred to as the "intermediate pseudo-fluctuation effect."

Each pseudo-variation effect (mid-game pseudo-variation effect and final-game pseudo-variation effect) is composed of a normal variation effect, a normal reach variation effect, and a pseudo consecutive effect.
The "normal reach variation effect" refers to a display effect in which the first effect pattern z1 is displayed temporarily stopped in two or more of the three first effect pattern display areas a1 to a3, and the combination of the first effect patterns z1 displayed temporarily stopped in two or more areas is a combination included in the "jackpot pattern."
In the following explanation, in a normal reach variation effect (or a reduced reach variation effect described later), the first effect pattern z1 that is temporarily displayed in a combination included in the "jackpot pattern" is referred to as the "first effect pattern z1 that forms the reach state."
Specifically, in the normal reach variation effect, the reach state is formed by the left and right symbols. That is, in the normal reach variation effect, the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the temporarily stopped left and right symbols are of the same type. In addition, in the normal reach variation effect, the normal variation display continues for the middle symbol.
A "temporary stop display" refers to a display in which one type of first performance pattern z1 remains in place for a predetermined period of time while moving (swinging, rotating, etc.) in a predetermined manner at the lottery result display position of the first performance pattern display area a1 to a3.

The "pseudo consecutive effect" is an effect that suggests whether or not the next pseudo-variable effect will be executed.
The "pseudo consecutive performance" is a type of pseudo consecutive performance that indicates whether or not the next pseudo variable performance will be executed, depending on whether or not the pseudo consecutive continuation pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed.
The "pseudo-continuation pattern" is composed of information (in this embodiment, the word "NEXT") that encourages the execution of the next pseudo-variable effect.
In this embodiment, the "pseudo consecutive effect" is defined as a "pseudo consecutive continuation effect" and a "pseudo consecutive end effect."
The "pseudo-continuation effect" is an effect that suggests that the next pseudo-variation effect will be executed after teasing whether or not the next pseudo-variation effect will be executed.
Specifically, in the "pseudo consecutive continuation effect", a pseudo consecutive continuation symbol (middle symbol) appears as a middle symbol, and the pseudo consecutive continuation symbol moves toward the lottery result display position. At this time, the movement speed (variation speed) of the pseudo consecutive continuation symbol is slower than the movement speed of the first effect symbol z1 in the normal variable display. Then, in the "pseudo consecutive continuation effect", the pseudo consecutive continuation symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. This indicates that the next pseudo variable effect will be executed.
The "pseudo consecutive end effect" is an effect that teases whether or not the next pseudo-variation effect will be executed, and then suggests that the next pseudo-variation effect will not be executed.
Specifically, in the "pseudo consecutive end effect", similar to the pseudo consecutive continuation effect, a pseudo consecutive continuation symbol (middle symbol) appears as a middle symbol, and the pseudo consecutive continuation symbol moves toward the lottery result display position. At this time, the moving speed of the pseudo consecutive continuation symbol is slower than the moving speed of the first effect symbol z1 in the normal variable display. Then, in the "pseudo consecutive end effect", the pseudo consecutive continuation symbol passes through the lottery result display position without being displayed as a temporary stop. This suggests that the next pseudo variable effect will not be executed.

In each pseudo-variable effect during a round, a normal variation effect is executed according to the start of the effect, and then a reach variation effect is executed. That is, after the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed in a normal variable manner, the left and right symbols are displayed temporarily in a stopped state, and a reach state is formed by the right and left symbols. Then, during the reach variation effect (while the reach state is formed), a pseudo-continuation effect is executed.
Each pseudo-variation effect during a round is ended in response to the end of the pseudo-successive continuous effect. Then, in response to the end of the pseudo-variation effect during a round, the next pseudo-variation effect is started.
In the final pseudo-variation effect of each round, a normal variation effect is executed according to the start of the effect, and then a reach variation effect is executed. That is, after the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed in a normal variation manner, the left and right symbols are displayed temporarily in a stopped state, and a reach state is formed by the right and left symbols. Then, during the reach variation effect (while the reach state is formed), a pseudo-consecutive end effect is executed.
The final pseudo-variation effect of each round ends in response to the end of the pseudo-consecutive end effect. Then, in response to the end of the final pseudo-variation effect, a second half variation effect (normal reach variation effect or super reach variation effect) starts.

Next, each aspect of the second half variable presentation will be explained.
In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern numbers (types of fluctuation patterns) are defined as a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "no-reach fluctuation", a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "normal reach fluctuation", and a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "super reach fluctuation".
In addition, the modes (variation effect numbers) of the latter half variation effects are defined as "non-reach variation effect,""normal reach variation effect," and "super reach variation effect."
Then, when a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "no-reach fluctuation" is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, "no-reach fluctuation presentation" is selected as the mode of the second half fluctuation presentation. On the other hand, when a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "normal reach fluctuation" is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, "normal reach fluctuation presentation" is selected as the mode of the second half fluctuation presentation. On the other hand, when a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "super reach fluctuation" is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, "super reach fluctuation presentation" is selected as the mode of the second half fluctuation presentation.
Here, the "no-reach fluctuation effect,""normal reach fluctuation effect," and "super reach fluctuation effect" can be executed regardless of the game state ("game state A" to "game state D").

The "non-reach variable effect" is configured to include a normal variable effect as a display effect.
Specifically, in the "non-reach variation effect", the "normal variation effect" is executed in response to the start of the "reach non-variation effect". That is, the normal variation display of the left, center and right symbols is started.
In the "no-reach fluctuation effect", the normal fluctuation display of the left, middle and right symbols ("normal fluctuation effect") continues until the end of the "no-reach fluctuation effect". Then, upon the end of the "no-reach fluctuation effect", a stop effect starts.
In addition, in the no-reach variable performance, the reach variable performance and the developed reach performance described below are not executed.
The "normal reach fluctuation effect" is composed of normal reach fluctuation effects.
Specifically, in the "normal reach variation effect," a normal reach variation effect is executed in response to its start. That is, the left and right symbols form a reach state. The normal reach variation effect ends in response to the passage of a predetermined time from its start.
The "normal reach variation effect" ends when the normal reach variation effect ends. Then, when the "normal reach variation effect" ends, a stop effect starts.
In addition, in the normal reach variation presentation, the developed reach presentation described below is not executed.

The "super reach variation effect" is composed of display effects including a normal reach variation effect, a reduced reach variation effect, and an advanced reach effect.
"Reduced reach variation effect" refers to a display effect in which the first effect symbol z1 that forms the reach state is displayed in a reduced size (temporarily stopped display). In particular, in the reduced reach variation effect, only the first effect symbol z1 that forms the reach state is displayed, and the display of the first effect symbol z1 that does not form the reach state is omitted. Specifically, in the reduced reach variation display, the right and left symbols that form the reach state are displayed in a reduced size and temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol is not displayed.
The "development reach effect" is an effect that provokes the "jackpot symbol" to be stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4. The development reach effect is executed during the reach variation effect.

In the "super reach variation effect", when it starts, a normal reach variation effect is executed, and then a reduced reach variation effect is executed.
That is, from a state in which the left and right symbols form a ready state, the left and right symbols that form the ready state are reduced, the reduced left symbol is moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 31a, the reduced right symbol is moved to the upper right corner of the display screen 31a, and the display of the center symbol disappears. At this time, the ready state is formed by the left and right symbols that are stopped and displayed in the stop effect related to the predetermined stop effect number.
In the "super reach variation effect", the "developed reach effect" is executed during the period in which the reduced reach variation effect is executed.
That is, the "developed reach effect" starts in response to the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the reduced reach variation effect. The "developed reach effect" ends in response to the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the "developed reach effect".
The "Super Reach Variation Presentation" ends when the "Development Reach Presentation" ends. Then, when the "Super Reach Variation Presentation" ends, a stop presentation starts.
In the "advanced reach effect", an effect image showing a battle between an ally character and an enemy character is displayed on the display screen 31a. In particular, the "advanced reach effect" is configured to include a "reach judgment effect". The "reach judgment effect" is an effect that suggests the result of the special symbol lottery (special symbol hit determination).
The "judgment effect during reach" is an effect in which the result of the battle between an ally character and an enemy character is judged (determined and determined). In this embodiment, the types of "judgment effect during reach" are defined as a "victory effect" and a "defeat effect". In the "victory effect", an effect image showing that the ally character wins against the enemy character is displayed on the display screen 31a. On the other hand, in the "defeat effect", an effect image showing that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is displayed on the display screen 31a.
Then, in the "developed reach effect", a "reach judgment effect" is executed according to the passage of a predetermined time from the start of the effect. At this time, if the special symbol lottery is won (if the special symbol hit judgment determines a "big hit" or a "small hit"), a "victory effect" is executed as the "reach judgment effect". On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery is lost (if the special symbol hit judgment determines a "miss"), a "defeat effect" is executed as the "reach judgment effect".
As a result, in the "development reach effect", the result of the special symbol lottery is suggested depending on which "reach judge effect" is executed, either the "victory effect" or the "defeat effect".

(Main preview performance)
Next, the main preview performance executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, a main notice performance is executed during execution of a variable performance.
The "main preview performance" is a performance that is executed during the variable performance, and is a performance that suggests the result of the start judgment related to the variable performance (special chart hit judgment, special chart pattern judgment, special chart variation pattern judgment, etc.).
In this embodiment, the main preview performance suggests the result of the special symbol pattern determination (specifically, the possibility that it is a "jackpot symbol").
In this embodiment, multiple types of main preview performances with different performance contents are defined.

(Big hit effect)
Next, the big win effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, a big win performance is executed during the occurrence of a big win game state.
The "jackpot effect" is an effect that is executed when a jackpot game state occurs, and is an effect that suggests the type of win ("jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 5").
In this embodiment, a jackpot presentation corresponding to each winning type (each of "jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 5") is defined.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, when "jackpot symbol 1" or "jackpot symbol 2" is hit, a "jackpot judgment effect" is executed as a jackpot effect. The "jackpot judgment effect" is an effect that suggests the game state (special symbol low probability state (game state D) or special symbol high probability state (game state B)) that occurs after the jackpot game state ends. The "jackpot judgment effect" is executed during the ending period.
That is, as described above, when "jackpot symbol 1" and "jackpot symbol 2" are won, the stopped symbols that are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area A are the same (specifically, "chance symbols"). Also, when "jackpot symbol 1" and "jackpot symbol 2" are won, the number of rounds of play that are executed is the same (specifically, 6 [rounds]). As a result, when a player wins "jackpot symbol 1" or "jackpot symbol 2", the player cannot distinguish between the two based on the appearance of the stopped symbols, the number of rounds of play, etc.
Therefore, when "jackpot pattern 1" or "jackpot pattern 2" is won, a "jackpot judgment effect" is executed as a jackpot effect, and the "jackpot judgment effect" is configured to suggest the game state that will occur after the jackpot game state ends.
That is, in the "judgment effect during jackpot", an effect image is displayed on the display screen 31a, showing that an ally character is attempting a predetermined mission (task). In particular, the "judgment effect during jackpot" is an effect in which the result of the mission attempt by the ally character is judged (determined and determined). In this embodiment, the types of "judgment effect during jackpot" are defined as a "success effect" and a "failure effect". Then, in the "success effect", an effect image is displayed on the display screen 31a, showing that the ally character's mission attempt is successful. On the other hand, in the "failure effect", an effect image is displayed on the display screen 31a, showing that the ally character's mission attempt is unsuccessful.
Then, if "jackpot symbol 1" or "jackpot symbol 2" is selected, a "jackpot judgment effect" is executed as the jackpot effect. At this time, if "jackpot symbol 1" is selected, a "failure effect" is executed as the "jackpot judgment effect". On the other hand, if "jackpot symbol 2" is selected, a "success effect" is executed as the "jackpot judgment effect".
This suggests the game state after the end of the jackpot game state depending on whether the "judgment effect during jackpot" is executed, either the "success effect" or the "failure effect."

(Processing executed on the performance control board 300)
Next, the processing executed by the CPU of the performance control board 300 will be described.
(CPU initialization process)
First, the CPU initialization process executed by the CPU of the performance control board 300 will be described.
A reset circuit (not shown) is provided on the performance control board 300. When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the reset circuit generates a reset signal.
The CPU of the performance control board 300 starts CPU initialization processing (not shown) in response to the generation of a reset signal by the reset circuit.
When the CPU initialization process starts, first, various registers, various timers (frame timer, phase timer, etc.), clock generation circuits, various RAMs, etc. are initialized. Next, a random number update process for performance is executed to update various random numbers for performance. After that, the random number update process for performance is executed repeatedly until various interrupt processes described below are executed.

(Command reception interrupt processing)
Next, the command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the performance control board 300 will be explained.
The CPU of the performance control board 300 executes a command reception interrupt process (not shown) in response to receiving a control command from the main control board 200.
In the command reception interrupt processing, the control command received from the main control board 200 is stored in the reception buffer area of the RAM of the performance control board 300.

(Sub-timer interrupt processing)
Next, the sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the performance control board 300 will be explained.
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the sub timer interrupt process.
The performance control board 300 includes a clock generating circuit that generates a clock pulse signal at predetermined intervals.
The CPU of the performance control board 300 starts the sub-timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 52 at predetermined intervals based on the generation of clock pulses by the clock generating circuit. When the sub-timer interrupt process starts, the process first proceeds to step S31-1.
In step S31-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-2, in which the register values are saved to a save area in RAM.
In step S31-2, a timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-3. In the timer update process, various timers (frame timer, phase timer, reset timer, etc.) provided in the performance control board 300 are updated.
In step S31-3, a command analysis process is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S31-4. In the command analysis process, the control command stored in the reception buffer of the RAM of the performance control board 300 is analyzed, and processing according to the received control command is executed. The command analysis process will be described later.

In step S31-4, a time schedule management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-5. In the time schedule management process, the progress of each performance is managed.
Here, the ROM of the performance control board 300 stores a performance control table corresponding to each performance (each aspect of the variable performance, each aspect of the stop performance, each aspect of the preview performance, each aspect of the pre-read preview performance, each aspect of the hold performance, etc.).
The "performance control table" contains information that defines the progress of performances (display performances, sound performances, lamp performances, movable body performances, etc.).
In each effect control table, multiple process data are registered in chronological order. Each process data contains one or more pieces of command information. Each piece of command information is a process that specifies the start of a specific effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable object effect). In particular, each piece of command information contains information that specifies the content of the effect to be started (display effect number, sound effect number, lamp effect number, or movable object effect number).

In the time schedule management process, the progress of each performance is managed based on the performance control table corresponding to each performance set in a specified area of the RAM of the performance control board 300 and the value of the performance management timer corresponding to that performance (the performance management timer that measures the elapsed time of that performance).
Specifically, for each effect, processing is performed based on the process data registered in the effect control table that corresponds to the current value of the effect management timer. As a result, the command information included in the process data is stored in a specified area of the RAM of the effect control board 300.
At this time, if the command information specifies the start of a display performance, display performance request information specifying the display performance number included in the command information is stored in the display performance request information storage area of the RAM of the performance control board 300.
On the other hand, if the command information specifies the start of a sound performance, sound performance request information specifying the sound performance number included in the command information is stored in the sound performance request information storage area of the RAM of the performance control board 300.
On the other hand, if the command information specifies the start of a lamp performance, lamp performance request information specifying the lamp performance number included in the command information is stored in the lamp performance request information storage area of the RAM of the performance control board 300.
On the other hand, if the command information specifies the start of a special feature performance, special feature performance request information specifying the special feature performance number included in the command information is stored in the special feature performance request information storage area of the RAM of the performance control board 300.
As a result of the above, processing based on each piece of process data is executed sequentially for all process data registered in the performance control table set in a specified area of the RAM of the performance control board 300.

In step S31-5, register restoration processing is performed, and the sub-timer interrupt processing ends. In the register restoration processing, the register values saved in step S31-1 are restored.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the command analysis process in step S31-3 will be described.
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process.
When the command analysis process is executed in step S31-3, the process proceeds to step S32-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S32-1, a setting value command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-2.
In the setting value command reception process, it is determined whether a subcommand specifying a setting value has been received. If it is determined that a subcommand specifying a setting value has been received, the setting value specified by the subcommand is saved (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the performance control board 300.

In step S32-2, a game status command receiving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-3.
In the game state command reception process, it is determined whether or not a game state designation command has been received. If it is determined that a game state designation command has been received, various effect flags are set.
In step S32-3, a pending command receiving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-4, which will be described later.
In step S32-4, a read-ahead command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-5, which will be described later.
In step S32-5, a variable command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-6, which will be described later.
In step S32-6, a stop command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-7, which will be described later.
In step S32-7, an opening command reception process is executed, and the series of processes ends, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4). The opening command reception process will be described later.

(Pending command reception processing)
Next, the pending command receiving process in step S32-3 will be described.
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the pending command reception process.
When the hold command receiving process is executed in step S32-3, the process proceeds to step S36-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not a hold number designation command has been received. If it is determined that a hold number designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-2. If it is determined that a hold number designation command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next step (step S32-4).
In step S36-2, it is determined whether the hold number specification command specifies an increase in the hold number (the hold number has increased by "1"), and if it is determined that the hold number specification command specifies an increase in the hold number (Yes), it proceeds to step S36-3, and if it is determined that the hold number specification command does not specify an increase in the hold number (specifies that the hold number has decreased by "1") (No), it proceeds to step S36-4.

In step S36-3, the pending number addition process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the reservation number addition process, first, it is determined whether the reservation number specification command specifies an increase in the reservation number for special chart 1.
Then, when it is determined that the reserve number designation command designates an increase in the reserve number of special chart 1, the value set in the reserve number counter of special chart 1 is added by "1" and set as a new reserve number counter of special chart 1. Also, a normal reserve effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special chart 1 game information is set.
For this purpose, the effect control table corresponding to the normal reserved effect is read out, and the read out effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. At this time, as the display area for displaying the reserved pattern h, of the five display positions included in the reserved pattern display area b1, a display position corresponding to the memory area (memory area 0 to memory area 4) in which the newly acquired special pattern 1 game information is stored is set. Here, the memory area (memory area 0 to memory area 4) in which the newly acquired special pattern 1 game information is stored is determined based on the value of the special pattern 1 reserved number counter.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the reserve number designation command specifies an increase in the special chart 2 reserve number, the value set in the special chart 2 reserve number counter is added by "1" and set as a new special chart 2 reserve number counter. Also, a normal reserve effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special chart 2 game information is set.
For this purpose, the effect control table corresponding to the normal reserved effect is read out, and the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. At this time, as the display area for displaying the reserved symbol h, of the five display positions included in the reserved symbol display area b2, a display position corresponding to the memory area (memory area 0 to memory area 4) in which the newly acquired special symbol 2 game information is stored is set. Here, the memory area (memory area 0 to memory area 4) in which the newly acquired special symbol 2 game information is stored is determined based on the value of the special symbol 2 reserved number counter.

In step S36-4, the pending number subtraction process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the reservation number subtraction process, first, it is determined whether the reservation number specification command specifies subtraction of the reservation number of special chart 1.
Then, when it is determined that the reserved number designation command designates the subtraction of the reserved number of special figure 1, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the reserved number counter of special figure 1 is newly set in the reserved number counter of special figure 1. Also, the display position of each reserved pattern h displayed in the reserved pattern display area b1 is shifted (moved).
Specifically, the reserved effect corresponding to the reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b1 at the position corresponding to the memory area 0 is terminated. This terminates the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the terminated reserved effect.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a position corresponding to memory area 1 in the reserved pattern display area b1, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the position corresponding to memory area 1 to the position corresponding to memory area 0.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a position corresponding to memory area 2 in the reserved pattern display area b1, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the position corresponding to memory area 2 to the position corresponding to memory area 1.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a position corresponding to the memory area 3 in the reserved pattern display area b1, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the position corresponding to the memory area 3 to the position corresponding to the memory area 2.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a position corresponding to memory area 4 in the reserved pattern display area b1, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the position corresponding to memory area 4 to the position corresponding to memory area 3.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the reserved number designation command specifies the subtraction of the reserved number of special figure 2, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the reserved number counter of special figure 2 is set in the reserved number counter of special figure 2. Also, the display position of each reserved pattern h displayed in the reserved pattern display area b2 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the reserved effect corresponding to the reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b2 at the position corresponding to the memory area 0 is terminated. This terminates the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the terminated reserved effect.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a position corresponding to memory area 1 in the reserved pattern display area b2, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the position corresponding to memory area 1 to the position corresponding to memory area 0.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a position corresponding to memory area 2 in the reserved pattern display area b2, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the position corresponding to memory area 2 to the position corresponding to memory area 1.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a position corresponding to the memory area 3 in the reserved pattern display area b2, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the position corresponding to the memory area 3 to the position corresponding to the memory area 2.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a position corresponding to memory area 4 in the reserved pattern display area b2, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the position corresponding to memory area 4 to the position corresponding to memory area 3.

(Pre-read command reception processing)
Next, the read-ahead command reception process in step S32-4 will be described.
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the read-ahead command reception process.
When the pre-read command reception process is executed in step S32-4, the process proceeds to step S33-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether or not a pre-reading designation command (first pre-reading designation command, second pre-reading designation command, and third pre-reading designation command) has been received, and if it is determined that a pre-reading designation command has been received (Yes), it proceeds to step S33-2, and if it is determined that a pre-reading designation command has not been received (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-2, a read-ahead information analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-3. In the read-ahead information analysis process, the information specified by the read-ahead designation command is stored as reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM of the performance control board 300.
The RAM of the performance control board 300 is configured to include a special chart 1 reserved information storage area in which special chart 1 reserved information is stored, and a special chart 2 reserved information storage area in which special chart 2 reserved information is stored.
The special chart 1 reserved information storage area is configured to include storage areas 0 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing special chart 1 reserved information. The special chart 1 reserved information storage area stores special chart 1 reserved information corresponding to the special chart 1 game information stored in the special chart 1 game information storage area.
That is, the special graphic 1 reserved information stored in storage area 0 of the special graphic 1 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special graphic 1 game information stored in storage area 0 of the special graphic 1 game information storage area. The special graphic 1 reserved information stored in storage area 1 of the special graphic 1 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special graphic 1 game information stored in storage area 1 of the special graphic 1 game information storage area. Furthermore, the special graphic 1 reserved information stored in storage area 2 of the special graphic 1 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special graphic 1 game information stored in storage area 2 of the special graphic 1 game information storage area. Furthermore, the special graphic 1 reserved information stored in storage area 3 of the special graphic 1 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special graphic 1 game information stored in storage area 3 of the special graphic 1 game information storage area. Furthermore, the special graphic 1 reserved information stored in storage area 4 of the special graphic 1 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special graphic 1 game information stored in storage area 4 of the special graphic 1 game information storage area.

The special chart 2 reserved information storage area is configured to include storage areas 0 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing special chart 2 reserved information. The special chart 2 reserved information storage area stores special chart 2 reserved information corresponding to the special chart 2 game information stored in the special chart 2 game information storage area.
That is, the special graphic 2 reserved information stored in storage area 0 of the special graphic 2 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special graphic 2 game information stored in storage area 0 of the special graphic 2 game information storage area. The special graphic 2 reserved information stored in storage area 1 of the special graphic 2 reserve information storage area corresponds to the special graphic 2 game information stored in storage area 1 of the special graphic 2 game information storage area. Furthermore, the special graphic 2 reserved information stored in storage area 2 of the special graphic 2 reserve information storage area corresponds to the special graphic 2 game information stored in storage area 2 of the special graphic 2 game information storage area. Furthermore, the special graphic 2 reserved information stored in storage area 3 of the special graphic 2 reserve information storage area corresponds to the special graphic 2 game information stored in storage area 3 of the special graphic 2 game information storage area. Furthermore, the special graphic 2 reserved information stored in storage area 4 of the special graphic 2 reserve information storage area corresponds to the special graphic 2 game information stored in storage area 4 of the special graphic 2 game information storage area.
Each reserved information (special chart 1 reserved information or special chart 2 reserved information) includes pattern information indicating the type of stopping pattern, first variable information indicating the content of the variable mode ("variable mode number" or "indeterminate value"), and second variable information indicating the content of the variable pattern ("variable pattern number" or "indeterminate value").

In the pre-reading information analysis process, first, it is determined whether or not the received first pre-reading designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
Then, when it is determined that the received first pre-reading designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol designated by the first pre-reading designation command ("missing symbol,""jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 5," or "small hit symbol 1"), the content of the fluctuation mode designated by the second pre-reading designation command ("fluctuation mode number" or "indefinite value"), and the content of the fluctuation pattern designated by the third pre-reading designation command ("fluctuation pattern number" or "indefinite value") are analyzed, and special symbol 1 reserved information is generated, including symbol information corresponding to the analyzed type of stop symbol, first fluctuation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed fluctuation mode, and second fluctuation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed fluctuation pattern.The generated special symbol 1 reserved information is then stored (saved) in a special symbol 1 reserved information storage area.
At this time, the priority of each storage area of the special drawing 1 reserved information storage area is specified to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (highest to lowest) in order of priority. The generated special drawing 1 reserved information is stored in an empty storage area among storage areas 1 to 4 (the empty storage area with the highest priority).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the received first pre-reading designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol designated by the first pre-reading designation command ("miss symbol,""jackpot symbol 3,""jackpot symbol 4," or "small hit symbol 1"), the content of the fluctuation mode designated by the second pre-reading designation command ("fluctuating mode number" or "indefinite value"), and the content of the fluctuation pattern designated by the third pre-reading designation command ("fluctuating pattern number" or "indefinite value") are analyzed, and special symbol 2 reserved information is generated, including symbol information corresponding to the analyzed type of stop symbol, first fluctuation information corresponding to the analyzed content of the fluctuation mode, and second fluctuation information corresponding to the analyzed content of the fluctuation pattern.The generated special symbol 2 reserved information is then stored (saved) in the special symbol 2 reserved information storage area.
At this time, the priority of each storage area of the special drawing 2 reserved information storage area is specified to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (highest to lowest) in order of priority. The generated special drawing 2 reserved information is stored in an empty storage area among storage areas 1 to 4 (the empty storage area with the highest priority).
In the following description, the reserved information (special chart 1 reserved information or special chart 2 reserved information) stored in the reserved information storage area in step S33-2 will be referred to as “acquired reserved information.” Also, among the reserved information (special chart 2 reserved information or special chart 2 reserved information) stored in the reserved information storage area (special chart 1 reserved information storage area or special chart 2 reserved information storage area), the reserved information for which the notification display (variable display and stop display) is executed before the acquired reserved information will be referred to as “preceding reserved information.”

Here, when the storage area of each game information (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) is shifted in the game information storage area (special chart 1 game information storage area or special chart 2 game information storage area), the storage area of the reserved information (special chart 1 reserved information or special chart 2 reserved information) corresponding to that game information is shifted in the reserved information storage area (special chart 1 reserved information storage area or special chart 2 reserved information storage area).
In this embodiment, in response to receiving a predetermined control command (pattern type designation command, variation mode designation command, and variation pattern designation command), the storage area of each reserved information (special chart 1 reserved information or special chart 2 reserved information) is shifted in the reserved information storage area (special chart 1 reserved information storage area or special chart 2 reserved information storage area).
At this time, when a predetermined control command corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) is received, the memory area in which the special symbol 1 reserved information is stored is shifted in the special symbol 1 reserved information memory area. That is, first, the memory contents of memory area 1 are shifted (moved) to memory area 0. Next, the memory contents of memory area 2 are shifted to memory area 1. Next, the memory contents of memory area 3 are shifted to memory area 2. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 are shifted to memory area 3. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 are cleared (initialized).
On the other hand, when a predetermined control command corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information) is received, the memory area in which the special symbol 2 reserved information is stored is shifted in the special symbol 2 reserved information memory area. That is, first, the memory contents of memory area 1 are shifted (moved) to memory area 0. Next, the memory contents of memory area 2 are shifted to memory area 1. Next, the memory contents of memory area 3 are shifted to memory area 2. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 are shifted to memory area 3. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 are cleared (initialized).

In addition, upon receiving a demo designation command, the contents of memory area 0 of the reserved information memory area (special chart 1 reserved information memory area or special chart 2 reserved information memory area) are cleared (initialized).
At this time, if a demo designation command is received specifying that a customer waiting state has begun for the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information), the contents stored in memory area 0 of the special pattern 1 pending information storage area are cleared (initialized).
On the other hand, when a demo designation command is received specifying that a customer waiting state has begun for the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information), the contents stored in memory area 0 of the special pattern 1 pending information storage area are cleared (initialized).

In step S33-3, it is determined whether or not a preview performance is currently being executed, and if it is determined that a preview performance is not currently being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S33-4, and if it is determined that a preview performance is currently being executed (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In this embodiment, while the pre-reading preview performance is being executed, "1" is set in the pre-reading preview performance flag area of the RAM of the performance control board 300. Therefore, in step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading preview performance is being executed based on whether or not "1" is set in the pre-reading preview performance flag area of the RAM of the performance control board 300.
In step S33-4, it is determined whether the conditions for executing the preview performance are met, and if it is determined that the conditions for executing the preview performance are met (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-5, and if it is determined that the conditions for executing the preview performance are not met (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In this embodiment, when all of the following conditions are met, it is determined that the conditions for executing the advance preview performance are met: (1) the acquired reserved information is special chart 2 reserved information; (2) a predetermined number (in this embodiment, "1") or more of advance reserved information is stored in the special chart 2 reserved information storage area; (3) there is no advance reserved information specifying a "jackpot pattern" in the special chart 2 reserved information storage area; (4) there is no advance reserved information specifying a variation pattern number corresponding to a "normal reach variation" or a "super reach variation" in the special chart 2 reserved information storage area (all advance reserved information stored in the special chart 2 reserved information storage area specifies "indefinite value" as the variation mode number/variation pattern number); (5) a special chart high probability state is occurring; and (6) neither a jackpot game state nor a small jackpot game state is occurring.
The contents of the pre-reading preview performance execution conditions can be changed as appropriate. That is, it may be configured such that it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance execution conditions are met when one or more of the above conditions (1) to (6) are met, rather than when all of the above conditions (1) to (6) are met. Furthermore, the pre-reading preview performance execution conditions may include other conditions different from the above conditions (1) to (6).

In step S33-5, a pre-reading advance notice effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-6. In the pre-reading advance notice effect lottery process, a pre-reading advance notice effect lottery is executed to determine whether or not a pre-reading advance notice effect will be executed.
The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores a pre-reading advance notice performance lottery table in which winning values of the pre-reading advance notice performance lottery are registered.
In the pre-reading advance notice effect lottery process, first, a pre-reading advance notice effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter, and then, based on the acquired pre-reading advance notice effect lottery random number and a pre-reading advance notice effect lottery table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect.
In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not the advance preview performance lottery executed in step S33-5 has been won. If it is determined that the advance preview performance lottery has been won (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-7; if it is determined that the advance preview performance lottery has been lost (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
Here, if it is determined that the player has won the pre-reading advance notice performance lottery, it is decided to execute a pre-reading advance notice performance (reserved advance notice performance) targeting the acquired reserved information.
In the following explanation, the acquired reserved information (special chart 2 reserved information) that is the target of the advance notice performance will be referred to as "reserved information to be notified." Also, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved information to be notified (reserved game information to be notified) will be referred to as "reserved symbol hy to be notified."
In addition, the special chart 2 game information that is the target of the pre-reading preview performance (the special chart 2 game information corresponding to the preview target hold information) is referred to as “pre-reading preview target game information.” Furthermore, among the special chart 2 game information stored in the special chart 2 game information storage area, the special chart 2 game information for which the start determination is executed before the preview target game information is referred to as “preceding game information.”

In step S33-7, a pre-reading notice effect setting process is executed, and the series of processes is ended and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5). In the pre-reading notice effect setting process, the content of the pre-reading notice effect (hold notice effect) is set.
Specifically, in the pre-reading preview effect setting process, first, a reserved final mode selection process is executed. In the reserved final mode selection process, a reserved final mode is selected and set.
The "final hold mode" is the mode of the hold pattern hy that is the subject of the notice that will ultimately change in the hold notice performance.
The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores a reservation final mode lottery table in which correspondence between reservation final mode lottery random numbers and reservation final modes is registered.
In addition, as a reserve final mode lottery table, a reserve final mode lottery table corresponding to each type of stopping pattern ('missing pattern', 'small winning pattern' or 'big winning pattern') is stored.
In the reserved final mode selection process, first, a reserved final mode lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Then, the type of stop pattern designated by the acquired reserved information is confirmed, and the reserved final mode lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, the reserved final mode is selected (determined) based on the acquired reserved final mode lottery random number and the read reserved final mode lottery table.

In the pre-reading preview effect setting process, a scenario selection process is then executed, in which a scenario (data) for the pending preview effect is selected and set.
The scenario for the hold notice performance is composed of information specifying one or more hold change triggers and information specifying a hold change pattern corresponding to each hold change trigger.
The "hold change trigger" is a trigger for changing the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified.
The "hold change pattern" is a pattern in which the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified changes.
The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores a scenario lottery table in which the correspondence between scenario lottery random numbers and scenarios of the pending notice performance is registered.
In addition, a scenario lottery table corresponding to each combination of the reserved final mode and the reserved number of special chart 2 is stored.
In addition, in the scenario lottery table corresponding to each reserved final mode, a scenario in which the mode of the reserved pattern hy to be predicted that will ultimately change becomes the reserved final mode is registered.
Here, in each scenario, as a hold change pattern corresponding to each hold change trigger, the state of the notice target hold pattern hy after the change is specified to be a state with a higher jackpot expectation compared to the state of the notice target hold hy before the change. As a result, during the execution of the hold notice performance, the state of the notice target hold pattern hy changes to a state with a higher jackpot expectation.
In the scenario selection process, first, a scenario lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Then, the reserved final mode selected in the reserved final mode selection process and the reserved number of special chart 2 are confirmed, and the scenario lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, based on the obtained scenario lottery random number and the read scenario lottery table, the scenario of the reserved notice performance is determined (determined).
In the pre-reading notice performance setting process, next, "1" is set in the pre-reading notice performance flag area of the RAM of the performance control board 300. Also, the scenario of the hold notice performance determined in the scenario selection process is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the performance control board 300. As a result, the hold notice performance is executed according to the set scenario.
In addition, by processing not shown, ``0'' is set in the advance preview performance flag area of the RAM of the performance control board 300 in response to the end of the pending preview performance (end of the notification display based on the game information to be previewed).

(Variable command reception processing)
Next, the variable command receiving process in step S32-5 will be described.
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the variable command receiving process.
When the variable command receiving process is executed in step S32-5, the process proceeds to step S34-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether or not a specified control command has been received. If it is determined that the specified control command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S34-2. If it is determined that the specified control command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next step (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control commands refer to a symbol type designation command, a variation mode designation command, and a variation pattern designation command.
In step S34-2, a stop effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-3. In the stop effect determination process, a stop effect number (a type of stop effect) is determined.
Specifically, in the stop effect determination process, a stop effect number (the mode of the stop effect) is determined based on the type of stop pattern specified by the pattern type designation command. The determined stop effect number is then stored in a stop effect number storage area in the RAM of the effect control board 300. At this time, if a pattern type designation command corresponding to a first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information) is received, the determined stop effect number is stored in a stop effect number storage area corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information). On the other hand, if a pattern type designation command corresponding to a second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information) is received, the determined stop effect number is stored in a stop effect number storage area corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information).

In step S34-3, a variable effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-4. In the variable effect determination process, a variable effect number (variable effect mode) is determined.
Specifically, in the variable presentation determination process, first, a first half variable presentation determination process is executed to determine the first half variable presentation number (the mode of the first half variable presentation).
The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores a first half variable performance lottery table in which the correspondence between the variable mode number (type of variable mode) and the first half variable performance number (form of first half variable performance) is registered.
In the first half variable effect determination process, first, a first half variable effect lottery table is read, and then, from among the first half variable effect numbers registered in the first half variable effect lottery table, a first half variable effect number corresponding to the variable mode number designated by the variable mode designation command is determined (selected).

In the variable performance determination process, next, a second half variable performance determination process is executed to determine a second half variable performance number (mode of second half variable performance).
The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores a second half variable performance lottery table in which the correspondence between the variable pattern number (type of variable pattern) and the second half variable performance number (mode of second half variable performance) is registered.
In the second half variable effect determination process, first, a second half variable effect lottery table is read, and then, from the second half variable effect numbers registered in the second half variable effect lottery table, a second half variable effect number corresponding to the variable pattern number designated by the variable pattern designation command is determined (selected).

In step S34-4, a preview effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-5. In the preview effect determination process, a main preview effect number (the mode of the main preview effect) is selected.
The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores a preview performance lottery table in which correspondence between preview performance lottery random numbers and main preview performance numbers (modes of main preview performance) is registered.
In addition, as a preview effect lottery table, a preview effect lottery table corresponding to each stopping pattern number (each type of stopping pattern) is stored.
To determine the mode of the main preview effect, first, a preview effect lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Then, the stop symbol number specified by the stop symbol designation command is confirmed, and the preview effect lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, the main preview effect number is determined (determined) based on the obtained preview effect lottery random number and the read preview effect lottery table.

In step S34-5, a variable effect setting process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the variable effect setting process, a variable effect control table is set.
Specifically, in the variable performance setting process, the performance control table corresponding to the first half variable performance number determined in step S34-3 and the performance control table corresponding to the second half variable performance number determined in step S34-3 are read out.
Next, the read-out performance control tables are combined to generate a performance control table relating to the variable performance. The generated performance control table is then set in a performance control table setting area of the RAM of the performance control board 300.
At this time, when a symbol type designation command corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) is received, the generated effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information). As a result, a variable effect (variable display of effect symbols z1 and z2) is started in the effect symbol display area A.
On the other hand, when a symbol type designation command corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information) is received, the generated effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information). This starts a variable effect (variable display of effect symbols z1 and z2) in the effect symbol display area B.
Also, the controller 100 reads out the effect control table corresponding to the main preview effect number determined in step S34-4. The read-out effect control table is then set in the effect control table setting area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. This causes the main preview effect to start at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable effect.

(Stop command reception processing)
Next, the stop command reception process in step S32-6 will be described.
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the stop command reception process.
When the stop command reception process is executed in step S32-6, the process proceeds to step S35-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not a stop command has been received. If it is determined that a stop command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-2. If it is determined that a stop command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next step (step S32-7).
In step S35-2, a stop effect setting process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7). In the stop effect setting process, a stop effect control table is set.
Specifically, in the stop effect setting process, when a stop designation command corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) is received, the stop effect number stored in the stop effect number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) is obtained, and the effect control table corresponding to the obtained stop effect number is read.Then, the read effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information).As a result, the stop effect (stop display of effect symbols z1 and z2) is started in the effect symbol display area A.
On the other hand, in the stop effect setting process, when a stop designation command corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information) is received, the stop effect number stored in the stop effect number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information) is obtained, and the effect control table corresponding to the obtained stop effect number is read.Then, the read effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information).As a result, the stop effect (stop display of effect symbols z1 and z2) is started in the effect symbol display area B.

(Opening command reception process)
Next, the opening command reception process in step S32-7 will be described.
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the opening command reception process.
When the opening command reception process is executed in step S32-7, the process proceeds to step S39-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S39-1, it is determined whether or not an opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that an opening designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S39-2. If it is determined that an opening designation command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next step (step S31-4).
In step S39-2, a winning effect setting process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4). In the winning effect setting process, a winning effect control table is set.
Specifically, in the winning effect setting process, the effect control table corresponding to the type of stop symbol specified by the opening designation command is read out. Then, the read out effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. This starts the winning effect.

(Action of Pachinko Machine 1)
The pachinko machine 1 includes a substrate 710 and components arranged on the substrate 710. The components include a light-emitting element 721 and other components (an IC 722, a connector 723 (wiring w), a screw member 730 (screw head 731), etc.). The other components (the IC 722, the connector 723 (wiring w), the screw member 730 (screw head 731), etc.) are arranged so as not to be within the irradiation range ir of the light emitted by the light-emitting element 721.
That is, in the pachinko machine 1, other components (IC 722, connector 723 (wiring w), screw member 730 (screw head 731), etc.) are arranged on the board 710 so that they do not enter the irradiation range ir of the light from the light-emitting element 721. This prevents the progression of the light irradiated from the light-emitting element 721 from being obstructed by the other components (IC 722, connector 723 (wiring w), screw member 730 (screw head 731), etc.), and prevents the reach of the light irradiated from the light-emitting element 721 from becoming narrower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the performance of the light irradiated from the light-emitting element 721.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to Example 1, the light-emitting element 721 is arranged on one of the two surfaces (front) of the substrate 710, and other components (IC 722, connector 723 (wiring w), screw member 730 (screw head 731), etc.) are arranged on the other of the two surfaces (back) of the substrate 710. When viewed from a direction perpendicular to the substrate 710, the area where the light-emitting element 721 is arranged does not overlap with the area where the other components (IC 722, connector 723 (wiring w), screw member 730 (screw head 731), etc.) are arranged.
That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to Example 1, the surface of the substrate 710 on which the light-emitting element 721 is arranged is different from the surface on which the other components (IC 722, connector 723 (wiring w), screw member 730 (screw head 731), etc.) are arranged. This makes it possible to more reliably prevent the other components (IC 722, connector 723 (wiring w), screw member 730 (screw head 731), etc.) from entering the irradiation range ir of the light from the light-emitting element 721.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to Example 1, the area where the light emitting element 721 is arranged does not overlap with the area where other components (IC 722, connector 723 (wiring w), screw member 730 (screw head 731), etc.) are arranged when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the substrate 710. This makes it possible to prevent the heat generated by driving the light emitting element 721 from damaging the other components (IC 722, connector 723 (wiring w), screw member 730 (screw head 731), etc.).
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to Example 3, the light emitting element 721 is disposed on the substrate 710 via a base member 721a. The height of the light emitting element 721 relative to the surface of the substrate 710 is higher than the height of other components (IC 722, connector 723 (wiring w), screw member 730 (screw head 731), etc.) relative to the surface of the substrate 710.
That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to Example 3, the height from the surface of the substrate 710 to the top surface of the light-emitting element 721 is higher than the height from the surface of the substrate 710 to the top surfaces of the other components (IC 722, connector 723 (wiring w), screw member 730 (screw head 731), etc.). This makes it possible to more reliably prevent the other components (IC 722, connector 723 (wiring w), screw member 730 (screw head 731), etc.) from entering the light irradiation range ir of the light-emitting element 721.

(Variation 1)
Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, various modifications can be made to the above embodiment.
For example, the above embodiment shows an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1. However, the present invention may be applied to other gaming machines as long as the gaming machine has a substrate including light-emitting elements. For example, the present invention may be applied to a pachislot machine or the like.
The above embodiment shows an example in which the present invention is applied to an illumination board 700. However, the present invention may be applied to other boards as long as they include light-emitting elements. For example, the present invention may be applied to a main control board 200, a performance control board 300, a payout control board 400, etc.

(Variation 2)
In addition, in the above embodiment, when the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of a jackpot game state, a special chart high probability state is generated in response to the end of the jackpot game state.
However, when a "high probability jackpot pattern" is determined by the special pattern determination, a special pattern high probability state may be generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.

(Variation 3)
In addition, in the above embodiment, the notification display (changing display and stopping display) of the first special pattern on the special pattern 1 display device and the notification display (changing display and stopping display) of the second special pattern on the special pattern 2 display device are configured to be executed simultaneously (at the same time) in parallel.
However, it is also acceptable for the configuration to be such that the notification display (changing display and stopping display) of the first special pattern on the special pattern 1 display device and the notification display (changing display and stopping display) of the second special pattern on the special pattern 2 display device are not executed simultaneously (at the same time) in parallel.
In other words, when neither a big hit game state nor a small hit game state is occurring, and the notification display (changing display or stop display) of the first special pattern is not being executed, and the notification display (changing display or stop display) of the second special pattern is not being executed, one game information is selected from the special game information stored in the special game information storage area and the special game information stored in the special game information storage area, and a start judgment is executed based on the selected game information.

(Variation 4)
In addition, in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be configured to be equipped with a ball dispensing limiting function.
The "ball output limiting function" is a function that makes it impossible to continue playing the game (limits the progress of the game) when the difference in the number of balls after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 reaches a specified number (95,000 [balls] in this modified example).
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a difference ball counter that counts the number of difference balls. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, a predetermined initial value (100,000 balls in this modified example) is set in the difference ball counter. Furthermore, while the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the difference ball counter counts the number of difference balls. That is, each time a detection signal is input from each of the switches 101, 102a, 102b, 103a, 103b, 105, and 106, the number of prize balls paid out in response to a game ball entering the ball entrance corresponding to that switch is added to the value of the difference ball counter. Furthermore, each time a detection signal is input from the out switch 109, "1" is subtracted from the value of the difference ball counter. When the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined threshold (195,000 balls in this modified example), a game operation stop state is set.
In this embodiment, the value of the difference ball number counter is cleared when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a gaming operation stop state is set based on the total (added) difference ball number (value of the difference ball number counter) for multiple days, and it is possible to set a gaming operation stop state based solely on the difference ball number (value of the difference ball number counter) for one day.

The "game operation stopped state" is a state in which it is not possible to progress with the pachinko machine 1 (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted). In this modified example, at least one of the ball release restriction function activation state and the firing stopped state is set as the game operation stopped state. Also, while the game operation stopped state is set, all lighting elements (segments) included in the main display device 60 are turned off. This makes it possible to reliably notify the player that the game is not progressing.
The "dispensing limit function activated state" is one of the gaming machine states. In other words, in this modified example, seven gaming machine states (playable state, setting change state, setting check state, setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, backup abnormal state, and dispensing limit function activated state) are defined. Furthermore, in the gaming machine state flag area, a value corresponding to one of the seven gaming machine states (specifically, playable state, setting change state, setting check state, setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, backup abnormal state, and dispensing limit function activated state) is stored (set) as a gaming machine state flag. Then, a gaming machine state corresponding to the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is generated. In particular, while the dispensing limit function activated state is generated, the execution of the above-described steps S4-9 to S4-18 is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, the regular game and the special game) is stopped.
The "launch stop state" is a state in which the launching operation of the game ball launcher 430 is stopped (restricted) (impossible) to be performed. In other words, while the launch stop state is set, even if a detection signal is input from the launch volume 410, the launching operation of the game ball launcher 430 is not performed.

In this modified example, if the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined threshold while the special prize state (big win game state/small win game state) is not occurring (during the period when the special prize state is not occurring), a game operation stop state is immediately set. On the other hand, if the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined threshold while the special prize state (big win game state/small win game state) is occurring (during the period when the special prize state is occurring), a game operation stop state is set after the special prize state (the period when the special prize state is occurring) ends. In this way, in this modified example, the timing at which the game operation stop state is set (started) differs depending on when the value of the difference ball counter reaches the predetermined threshold. In other words, the time required for the game operation stop state to be set (started) differs depending on when the value of the difference ball counter reaches the predetermined threshold.
If the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined threshold while the special prize state (big win game state/small win game state) is not occurring, the game operation stop state may be set after the next special prize state (big win game state/small win game state) ends. Also, if the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined threshold while the special prize state (big win game state/small win game state) is occurring, the game operation stop state may be set immediately.
In this modification, when a predetermined game operation stop state release condition is met, the game operation stop state is released and the game can proceed. At this time, the game operation stop state release condition is met when at least one of the above-mentioned setting change condition (when RAM is cleared via the setting change state) and the normal RAM clear condition (when RAM is cleared without going through the setting change state) is met.
As described above, the setting change condition is met when, at power-on, a detection signal is input from the inner frame open sensor 108, a detection signal is input from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal is input from the RAM clear switch 207.
In addition, the normal RAM clear condition is met when, when the power is turned on, no detection signal is input from the inner frame open sensor 108, no detection signal is input from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal is input from the RAM clear switch 207.

In particular, in this modified example, during a predetermined period such as during a waiting state for customers or during a jackpot game state (ending period), an image explaining the ball-out limiting function is displayed on the display screen 31a. The "ball-out limiting function explanatory image" displays information explaining the content and inclusion of the ball-out limiting function (a function that makes it impossible to continue playing a game when the difference in the number of balls after the power to the pachinko machine 1 reaches a specified number (95,000 [balls] in this modified example)). As a result, the ball-out limiting function explanatory image notifies the user of the content and inclusion of the function that makes it impossible to continue playing a game depending on the difference in the number of balls.
Furthermore, in this modified example, at a predetermined timing before the value of the ball difference counter reaches a predetermined threshold (before the ball difference reaches a specified number (95,000 [balls] in this modified example)), information suggesting (notifying) that the ball difference is approaching the specified number is displayed on the display screen 31a. For example, when the value of the ball difference counter reaches 190,000 [balls] (the ball difference reaches 90,000 [balls]), the message "5,000 [balls] remaining until the ball discharge limiting function is activated!" is displayed. This notifies the user of the remaining number of ball difference until the ball discharge limiting function is activated.
Alternatively, when the value of the ball difference counter reaches 190,000 balls (the ball difference reaches 90,000 balls), a test signal may be output to notify that the ball difference is approaching a specified number (notifying that the game operation stop state is approaching). For example, the test signal may be continuously output during the period when the ball difference counter value is between 190,000 and 195,000 (the ball difference is between 90,000 and 95,000). In other words, when performing a test to measure the ball delivery rate, if the ball difference reaches the specified number (95,000 balls in this modification), the game operation stop state is set, and gameplay is interrupted, making it difficult to accurately measure the ball delivery rate. In this case, a solution is to shut off the power to the pachinko machine 1 and reset the value of the ball difference counter before the ball difference reaches a specified number (95,000 balls in this modified example), thereby avoiding the game operation suspension state and allowing the ball dispensing rate measurement test to continue. Therefore, by outputting a test signal indicating that the ball difference is approaching the specified number, it becomes easier to determine the timing to shut off the power to the pachinko machine 1. In particular, since the notification "5,000 balls remaining until the ball dispensing limit function is activated!" is also issued at the same time as the test signal is output, it becomes possible to more accurately notify the approaching game operation suspension state. This improves testing efficiency during development. Note that the test signal can be output only when a dedicated jig is installed, while mass-produced machines (pachinko machines 1) sold on the market may be configured not to output the test signal and may only have a program related to processing the test signal.
Furthermore, in this modified example, when the value of the ball difference counter reaches a predetermined threshold (the ball difference reaches a specified number (95,000 balls in this modified example)) during the special prize state (big win game state/small win game state), in response (during the special prize state), the display screen 31a displays a display related to the big win effect (small win effect) along with information suggesting (informing) that the ball dispensing limit function will be activated upon the end of the special prize state. For example, during the special prize state, the message "After the win ends, the ball dispensing limit function will be activated and game will be stopped" is displayed superimposed on the display related to the big win effect (small win effect). This notifies the player that the ball dispensing limit function will be activated upon the end of the special prize state.
Furthermore, in this modified example, when the ball dispensing limit function is activated (started), a notification image is displayed to indicate (notify) that the ball dispensing limit function is activated. At this time, the content of the notification image is configured to change depending on the game history up to that point (number of consecutive wins, etc.).
Furthermore, in this modified example, while the game operation stop state is being set (the ball dispensing limit function is in operation), ball dispensing limit function activation information (e.g., the text "Game operation stop state being set (ball dispensing limit function in operation)") is displayed on the display screen 31a to notify the user that the game operation stop state is being set (the ball dispensing limit function is in operation). This notifies the user that the game operation stop state is being set (the ball dispensing limit function is in operation). In particular, the display (notification) of the ball dispensing limit function activation information is given a higher priority than the display (notification) of error information that notifies the occurrence of other errors (abnormal conditions). For example, the display (notification) priority is as follows: ball dispensing control function activation information > error information for "large prize entry port abnormal prize entry error"> error information for "prize entry frequency abnormal error"> error information for "door open error." This allows the ball dispensing limit function activation information to be displayed without any problems even if the ball dispensing limit function is activated while another error (abnormal condition) is occurring. However, even when the game operation is stopped (the ball-out limiting function is activated), if error information is not reported for a door-opening error, there is a possibility that the door may be opened while the game operation is stopped (the ball-out limiting function is activated). Therefore, it is preferable to prioritize the display (reporting) of error information as follows: "Door-opening error while ball-out limiting function is activated">"Ball-out control function activation" information >"Abnormal large prize entry error" error >"Abnormal prize frequency error" error >"Door-opening error while ball-out limiting function is not activated." By providing a "Door-opening error while ball-out limiting function is activated" in addition to the normal door-opening error (door-opening error while ball-out limiting function is not activated), it is possible to report error information for door-opening errors even when the ball-out limiting function is activated.
Here, the "door open error" is an error (abnormal state) that is detected when a door is opened (the integrated door unit 4 is opened relative to the inner frame unit 3, or the inner frame unit 3 is opened relative to the outer frame unit 2). The "abnormal winning frequency error" is an error (abnormal state) that is detected when the number of game balls that enter a predetermined ball entry port per predetermined time period exceeds a predetermined number. The "abnormal large prize entry port winning error" is an error (abnormal state) that is detected when the number of game balls that enter the large prize entry ports 54, 55 when a large win game state is not occurring exceeds a predetermined number.

(Variation 5)
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a sub-display device may be provided in the pachinko machine 1. The sub-display device is provided in the integrated door unit 4, the game board unit 10, etc. In particular, the sub-display device is provided closer to the player than the main display device 60, and is therefore able to properly notify the player of the game status.
The sub-display device is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments), each of which is configured by a light-emitting element (an LED in this embodiment).
The sub-display device displays information about the game. Specifically, the sub-display device includes a special chart 1 display device, a special chart 2 display device, a regular chart display device, a special chart 1 reserve display device, a special chart 2 reserve display device, a regular chart reserve display device, and a right-hit display device. Each device is composed of one or more lighting elements (light-emitting elements (LEDs in this embodiment)).
The special pattern 1 display device included in the sub-display device is capable of displaying the changing and stopping of a first special pattern consisting of numbers, patterns, etc., just like the special pattern 1 display device included in the main display device 60.
The special symbol 2 display device included in the sub-display device is capable of displaying the changing and stopping of a second special symbol consisting of numbers, patterns, etc., just like the special symbol 2 display device included in the main display device 60.
The normal pattern display device included in the sub-display device is capable of displaying changing and stopping normal patterns consisting of numbers, patterns, etc., just like the normal pattern display device included in the main display device 60.
The special pattern 1 pending display device included in the sub-display device, like the special pattern 1 pending display device included in the main display device 60, displays the number of times the display of the lottery results of the first special pattern lottery has been pending (special pattern 1 pending number).
The special pattern 2 reserved display device included in the sub-display device, like the special pattern 2 reserved display device included in the main display device 60, displays the number of times the display of the lottery results of the second special pattern lottery is reserved (special pattern 2 reserved number).
The regular symbol pending display device included in the sub-display device, like the regular symbol pending display device included in the main display device 60, displays the number of times the display of the regular symbol lottery result has been pending (number of regular symbols pending).
The right-hand hitting display device included in the sub-display device displays the path (left-hand path or right-hand path) along which the game ball should be shot, similar to the right-hand hitting display device included in the main display device 60.
Here, as described above, while the game operation stop state is being set, all lighting elements included in the main display device 60 (special chart 1 display device, special chart 2 display device, normal chart display device, special chart 1 reserve display device, special chart 2 reserve display device, normal chart reserve display device, round display device, right-hand hit display device, probability change display device, and time-saving display device) are turned off. Meanwhile, while the game operation stop state is being set, the lighting state of each lighting element included in the sub-display device (special chart 1 display device, special chart 2 display device, normal chart display device, special chart 1 reserve display device, special chart 2 reserve display device, normal chart reserve display device, and right-hand hit display device) immediately before the game operation stop state is set is maintained. For example, if, immediately before the game operation stopped state, the right-hand hit display device displays information specifying the right-hand path as the path from which the game ball should be shot (displayed by the lighting of a predetermined lighting element), the special symbol 2 reserved number display device displays information indicating that the special symbol 2 reserved number = "2" (displayed by the lighting of a predetermined lighting element), and the special symbol 2 display device displays information indicating that the second special symbol is being displayed (displayed by the flashing of a predetermined lighting element), then the lighting state (display state) of each lighting element will be maintained even while the game operation stopped state is being set. Therefore, although the lighting state (display state) immediately before the game operation stopped state was set is unknown on the main display device 60, it is possible to confirm what lighting state (display state) the game operation stopped state was in using the sub-display device.

1 Pachinko machine 200 Main control board 300 Performance control board 700 Illumination board 710 Board 720 Electronic component 721 Light-emitting element 721a Base member 722 IC
723 Connector 730 Screw member 731 Head IR irradiation range

Claims (1)

A substrate;
a component disposed on the substrate;
The components include a top-view type light-emitting means and other components;
the other components include an IC that controls driving of the light emitting means;
the other component is disposed at an outer position relative to the light emitting means;
Between the light emitting means and the other component, nothing is disposed that blocks the light emitted by the light emitting means, except for the components that constitute the light emitting means;
a height of the other component relative to the surface of the substrate is greater than a height of the light-emitting means relative to the surface of the substrate;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the other components are arranged so as not to be within the range of light irradiation by the light emitting means.